Attribution Non-Commercial (BY-NC)

2.1K views

Attribution Non-Commercial (BY-NC)

- MD Nastran 2010 Dynamic Analysis User's Guide
- PATRAN Tutorial
- Merge ABAQUS Command
- MSC Nastran 2010 Release Guide
- Patran 2008 r1 Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling
- MD Nastran Demonstration Problems 2010
- Patran 2010 User's Guide
- Patran 2010 Interface To MSC Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis
- MSC/Patran
- MSC PATRAN - Reference Manual - Fem_modeling
- HM10 Intro Final
- Msc Nastran 2012 Release Guide
- Patran 2008 r1 Reference Manual Part 3: Finite Element Modeling
- MSC.Nastran Basic Dynamic Analysis User's Guide
- Patran 2008 r1 Interface to LS-DYNA Preference Guide
- Nastran Workshop 4a
- MSC.Nastran 2007 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User's Guide
- w5
- MD Nastran R3 Quick Reference Guide
- Fem Modeling,Patran

You are on page 1of 734

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 2: Geometry Modeling Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

1

Introduction to ■ Overview of Capabilities, 2

Geometry ■ Concepts and Definitions, 4

Modeling

❑ Parameterization, 5

❑ Topology, 10

- Topological Congruency and Meshing, 12

❑ Connectivity, 15

❑ Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran, 17

❑ Global Model Tolerance & Geometry, 18

❑ Trimmed Surfaces, 20

❑ Solids, 24

❑ Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25

- Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25

❑ Matrix of Geometry Types Created, 27

❑ Building a Congruent Model, 31

❑ Building Optimal Surfaces, 33

❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 37

❑ Building B-rep Solids, 40

❑ Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids, 41

2

Accessing, ■ Overview, 46

Importing & ■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47

Exporting

❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47

Geometry

❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 55

3

Coordinate ■ Coordinate Frame Definitions, 60

Frames ■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames, 63

■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames, 66

4

Create Actions ■ Overview of Geometry Create Action, 70

■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 74

❑ Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method), 74

❑ Create Point ArcCenter, 79

❑ Extracting Points, 81

- Extracting Points from Curves and Edges, 81

- Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces, 84

- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 86

- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 88

- Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface, 90

❑ Interpolating Points, 91

- Between Two Points, 91

- Interpolating Points on a Curve, 94

❑ Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points, 97

❑ Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance, 107

❑ Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points, 109

❑ Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces, 112

❑ Creating Curves Between Points, 117

- Creating Curves Through 2 Points, 117

- Creating Curves Through 3 Points, 119

- Creating Curves Through 4 Points, 123

❑ Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method), 128

❑ Creating Chained Curves, 131

❑ Creating Conic Curves, 133

❑ Extracting Curves From Surfaces, 137

- Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option, 137

- Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option, 142

❑ Creating Fillet Curves, 144

❑ Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points, 148

❑ Creating Curves at Intersections, 150

- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces, 150

- Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface, 154

- Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form, 157

- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes, 158

❑ Manifold Curves Onto a Surface, 160

- Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option, 160

- Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option, 164

- Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form, 167

❑ Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal

Method), 168

❑ Creating Offset Curves, 171

- Creating Constant Offset Curve, 171

- Creating Variable Offset Curve, 173

- Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve, 174

❑ Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces, 176

- Project Parameters Subordinate Form, 182

❑ Creating Piecewise Linear Curves, 183

❑ Creating Spline Curves, 185

- Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option, 185

- Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option, 189

❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method), 193

❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points

(TanPoint Method), 195

❑ Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ

Method), 199

❑ Creating Involute Curves, 203

- Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option, 203

- Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option, 206

❑ Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 208

❑ Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method), 214

- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option, 214

- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option, 218

❑ Creating 2D Circle Curves, 222

❑ Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves, 226

❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method), 229

- Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option, 229

- Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option, 233

- Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form, 236

❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method), 237

❑ Creating Surfaces from Curves, 240

- Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves, 240

- Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method), 243

- Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method), 246

- Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method), 248

❑ Creating Composite Surfaces, 250

❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 255

❑ Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method), 257

❑ Extracting Surfaces, 260

- Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option, 260

- Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option, 264

❑ Creating Fillet Surfaces, 266

❑ Matching Adjacent Surfaces, 270

❑ Creating Constant Offset Surface, 272

❑ Creating Ruled Surfaces, 274

❑ Creating Trimmed Surfaces, 278

- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option, 280

- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option, 281

- Auto Chain Subordinate Form, 282

- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option, 284

❑ Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method), 287

❑ Extruding Surfaces and Solids, 289

❑ Gliding Surfaces, 294

- Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option, 294

- Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option, 296

❑ Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method, 298

❑ Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method), 305

- Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form, 306

❑ Creating Midsurfaces, 307

- Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option, 307

- Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option, 309

❑ Creating Solid Primitives, 311

- Creating a Solid Block, 311

- Creating Solid Cylinder, 314

- Creating Solid Sphere, 317

- Creating Solid Cone, 320

- Creating Solid Torus, 323

- Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation, 326

❑ Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method), 327

- Creating Solids from Two Surfaces, 327

- Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method), 330

- Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method), 333

- Creating Solids with the N Surface Option, 336

❑ Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid, 338

❑ Creating a Decomposed Solid, 340

❑ Creating Solids from Faces, 343

❑ Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method), 346

❑ Gliding Solids, 348

■ Creating Coordinate Frames, 350

❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method, 350

❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method, 353

❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method, 355

❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method, 358

❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method, 361

❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method, 362

❑ Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method, 363

❑ Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method, 365

❑ Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method, 367

- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option, 367

- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric

Option, 369

❑ Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method, 371

❑ Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method, 372

- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option, 372

- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option, 374

❑ Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method, 375

- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option, 375

- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option, 377

- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option, 379

❑ Creating Planes with the Offset Method, 381

❑ Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method, 383

- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option, 383

- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric

Option, 385

❑ Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method, 387

❑ Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method, 389

❑ Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method, 391

- Between Two Points, 391

❑ Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method, 393

❑ Creating Vectors with the Normal Method, 395

- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option, 395

- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option, 397

- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option, 399

❑ Creating Vectors with the Product Method, 402

❑ Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method, 404

5

Delete Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Delete Action, 408

■ Deleting Any Geometric Entity, 409

■ Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors, 410

■ Deleting Coordinate Frames, 411

6

Edit Actions ■ Overview of the Edit Action Methods, 414

■ Editing Points, 416

❑ Equivalencing Points, 416

❑ Breaking Curves, 418

- Breaking a Curve at a Point, 418

- Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location, 422

- Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location, 425

❑ Blending a Curve, 426

❑ Disassembling a Chained Curve, 429

❑ Extending Curves, 431

- Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option, 431

- Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type, 436

- Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type, 438

- Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option, 440

❑ Merging Existing Curves, 443

❑ Refitting Existing Curves, 447

❑ Reversing a Curve, 448

❑ Trimming Curves, 451

- Trimming a Curve With the Point Option, 451

- Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option, 454

■ Editing Surfaces, 457

❑ Surface Break Options, 457

- Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option, 457

- Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option, 461

- Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option, 463

- Breaking a Surface With the Point Option, 465

- Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option, 469

- Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option, 471

❑ Blending Surfaces, 475

❑ Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces, 478

❑ Matching Surface Edges, 481

- Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option, 481

- Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option, 484

❑ Extending Surfaces, 486

- Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option, 486

- Extending Surfaces to a Curve, 488

- Extending Surfaces to a Plane, 490

- Extending Surfaces to a Point, 492

- Extending Surfaces to a Surface, 494

- Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option, 496

- Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option, 498

❑ Refitting Surfaces, 500

❑ Reversing Surfaces, 501

❑ Sewing Surfaces, 503

❑ Trimming Surfaces to an Edge, 505

❑ Adding a Fillet to a Surface, 507

❑ Removing Edges from Surfaces, 508

- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option, 508

- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option, 509

❑ Adding a Hole to Surfaces, 510

- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option, 510

- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option, 512

- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option, 514

❑ Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces, 516

❑ Adding a Vertex to Surfaces, 518

❑ Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces, 520

■ Editing Solids, 522

❑ Breaking Solids, 522

- Breaking Solids with the Point Option, 522

- Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option, 526

- Breaking Solids with the Curve Option, 531

- Breaking Solids with the Plane Option, 533

- Breaking Solids with the Surface Option, 535

❑ Blending Solids, 538

❑ Disassembling B-rep Solids, 541

❑ Refitting Solids, 543

- Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option, 543

- Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option, 544

- Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option, 545

❑ Reversing Solids, 546

❑ Solid Boolean Operation Add, 548

❑ Solid Boolean Operation Subtract, 550

❑ Solid Boolean Operation Intersect, 552

❑ Creating Solid Edge Blends, 554

- Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges, 554

- Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges, 556

❑ Imprinting Solid on Solid, 558

❑ Solid Shell Operation, 560

❑ Suppressing a Feature, 562

❑ Unsuppressing a Feature, 563

❑ Editing Feature Parameters, 564

❑ Feature Parameter Definition, 565

7

Show Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods, 568

❑ The Show Action Information Form, 569

❑ Showing Point Locations, 570

❑ Showing Point Distance, 571

- Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, 571

- Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, 573

- Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option, 575

- Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option, 577

- Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option, 579

❑ Showing the Nodes on a Point, 581

■ Showing Curves, 582

❑ Showing Curve Attributes, 582

❑ Showing Curve Arc, 583

❑ Showing Curve Angle, 584

❑ Showing Curve Length Range, 586

❑ Showing the Nodes on a Curve, 587

❑ Showing Surface Attributes, 588

❑ Showing Surface Area Range, 589

❑ Showing the Nodes on a Surface, 590

❑ Showing Surface Normals, 591

❑ Showing Solid Attributes, 593

❑ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes, 594

❑ Showing Plane Attributes, 595

❑ Showing Plane Angle, 596

❑ Showing Plane Distance, 598

❑ Showing Vector Attributes, 599

8

Transform Actions ■ Overview of the Transform Methods, 602

■ Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605

❑ Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605

❑ Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 619

❑ Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors, 629

❑ Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 640

❑ Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate

Frame Reference (MCoord Method), 648

❑ Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 656

❑ Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 665

❑ Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 674

❑ Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 683

❑ Translating Coordinate Frames, 690

❑ Rotating Coordinate Frames, 693

9

Verify Actions ■ Verify Action, 698

❑ Verifying Surface Boundaries, 698

❑ Verifying Surfaces for B-reps, 700

- Update Graphics Subordinate Form, 701

❑ Verify - Surface (Duplicates), 702

10

Associate Actions ■ Overview of the Associate Action, 704

❑ Associating Point Object, 705

❑ Associating Curve Object, 707

11

Disassociate ■ Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods, 710

Actions ❑ Disassociating Points, 711

❑ Disassociating Curves, 712

❑ Disassociating Surfaces, 713

12

The Renumber ■ Introduction, 716

Action... ■ Renumber Forms, 717

Renumbering Geo

❑ Renumber Geometry, 718

metry

Part 2: Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

1

■ Overview of Capabilities

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

A powerful and important feature of MSC.Patran is its geometry capabilities. Geometry can be:

• Created.

• Directly accessed from an external CAD part file.

• Imported from an IGES file or a PATRAN 2 Neutral file.

Complete Accuracy of Original Geometry. MSC.Patran maintains complete accuracy of the

original geometry, regardless of where it came from. The exact mathematical representation of

the geometry (e.g., Arc, Rational B-Spline, B-rep, Parametric Cubic, etc.) is consistently

maintained throughout the modeling process, without any approximations or conversions.

This means different versions of the geometry model are avoided. Only one copy of the

geometry design needs to be maintained by the engineer, whether the geometry is in a separate

CAD part file or IGES file or the geometry is part of the MSC.Patran database.

Below are highlights of the geometry capabilities:

boundary conditions (BC) and element property assignments can be applied directly to the

geometry. When the geometry is meshed with a set of nodes and elements, MSC.Patran will

automatically assign the loads/BC or element property to the appropriate nodes or elements.

Although you can apply the loads/BCs or element properties directly to the finite element mesh,

the advantage of applying them to the geometry is if you remesh the geometry, they remain

associated with the model. Once a new mesh is created, the loads/BC and element properties

are automatically reassigned.

For more information, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

Direct Geometry Access. Direct Geometry Access (DGA) is the capability to directly access

(or read) geometry information from an external CAD user file, without the use of an

intermediate translator. Currently, DGA supports the following CAD systems:

• EDS/Unigraphics

• Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology

• CATIA by Dassault Systemes

• EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision

• CADDS 5 by Computervision

With DGA, the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD user file can be

accessed. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry

in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads/BC and the element properties directly

to the geometry.

For more detailed information on DGA, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

(p. 47).

Import and Export of Geometry. There are three file formats available to import or export

geometry:

• IGES

CHAPTER 1 3

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

• Express Neutral File

In using any of the file formats, MSC.Patran maintains the original mathematical form of the

geometry. (That is, the geometry is not approximated into the parametric cubic form.) This

means the accuracy of the geometry in all three files is maintained.

For more information on the import and export capabilities for IGES, PATRAN 2 Neutral File,

and the Express Neutral File, see Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry (Ch. 2).

MSC.Patran Native Geometry. You can also create geometry in MSC.Patran (“native”

geometry). A large number of methods are available to create, translate, and edit geometry, as

well as methods to verify, delete and show information.

MSC.Patran’s native geometry consists of:

• Points

• Parametric curves

• Bi-parametric surfaces

• Tri-parametric solids

• Boundary represented (B-rep) solids

All native geometry is fully parameterized both on the outer boundaries and within the interior

(except for B-rep solids which are parameterized only on the outer surfaces).

Fully parameterized geometry means that you can apply varying loads or element properties

directly to the geometric entity. MSC.Patran evaluates the variation at all exterior and interior

locations on the geometric entity.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

There are many functions in MSC.Patran that rely on the mathematical representation of the

geometry. These functions are:

• Applying a pressure load to a curve, surface or solid.

• Creating a field function in parametric space.

• Meshing a curve, surface or solid.

• Referencing a vertex, edge or face of a curve, surface or solid.

For every curve, surface or solid in a user database, information is stored on its

Parameterization, Topology and Connectivity which is used in various MSC.Patran functions.

The concepts of parameterization, connectivity and topology are easy to understand and they

are important to know when building a geometry and an analysis model.

The following sections will describe each of these concepts and how you can build an optimal

geometry model for analysis.

CHAPTER 1 5

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Parameterization

All MSC.Patran geometry are labeled one of the following:

• Point (0-Dimensions)

• Curve (1-Dimension)

• Surface (2-Dimensions)

• Solid (3-Dimensions)

Depending on the order of the entity - whether it is a one-dimensional curve, a two-dimensional

surface, or a three-dimensional solid - there is one, two or three parameters labeled ξ 1 , ξ 2 ,

ξ 3 that are associated with the entity. This concept is called “parameterization”.

Parameterization means the X,Y,Z coordinates of a curve, surface or solid are represented as

functions of variables or parameters. Depending on the dimension of the entity, the X,Y,Z

locations are functions of the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 .

An analogy to the parameterization of geometry is describing an X , Y location as a function of

time, t t. If X = X ( t ) and Y = Y ( t ) , as t changes, X and Y will define a path. Parameterization

of geometry does the same thing - as the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 change, it defines various

points on the curve, surface and solid.

The following describes how a point, curve, surface and solid are parameterized in MSC.Patran.

space.

Since a point has zero-dimensions, it has no associated parameters, therefore, it is not

parameterized.

P

z (X,Y,Z)

x y

space. A curve can also be described as a particle moving along a defined path in space.

Another way of defining a curve is, a curve is a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ) , from one-dimensional

parametric space into three-dimensional global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-3.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

A curve has one parametric variable, ξ 1 , which is used to describe the location of any given

point, P , along a curve, as shown in Figure 1-2.

P V2

ξ1

z V1

x y

ξ 1 = 1 , P is at endpoint V2 .

A straight curve can be defined as:

Φ(ξ1)

V2

0 ξ1 1

z

ξ1

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 V1

x y

The derivative of Φ ( ξ 1 ) in Eq. 1-2, would give us Eq. 1-3 which is the tangent of the straight

curve.

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = V2 – V1 Eq. 1-3

Because the curve is straight, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 is a constant value. The tangent, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , also defines a

vector for the curve, which is the positive direction of ξ 1 .

CHAPTER 1 7

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

For any given curve, the tangent and positive direction of ξ 1 at any point along the curve can be

found. (The vector, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , usually will not have a length of one.)

XYZ space.

A surface has two parameters, ξ 1 and ξ 2 , where at any given point, P , on the surface, P can be

located by ξ 1 and ξ 2 , as shown in Figure 1-4.

V2

ξ2

V1 P

ξ1

z V3

x y

V4

A surface generally has three or four edges. Trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges.

For more information, see Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20).

Similar to a curve, ξ 1 and ξ 2 for a surface have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Thus, at

ξ 1 = 0 , ξ 2 = 0 , P is at V1 and at ξ 1 = 1 , ξ 2 = 1 , P is at V3 .

A surface is represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ) , which maps the parametric space into

the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-5.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2)

(0,1) (1,1)

V2

ξ2

ξ2 V1

ξ1 z ξ1 V3

(0,0) (1,0)

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 x

V4

y

0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1

The first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ) results in two partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 :

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction and T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2

direction.

At any point for a given surface, T ξ1 and T ξ2 which define the tangents and the positive ξ 1 and

ξ 2 directions can be determined.

Usually T ξ1 and T ξ2 are not orthonormal, which means they do not have a length of one and

they are not perpendicular to each other.

space.

A solid has three parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , where at any given point, P , within the solid, P

can be located by ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , as shown in Figure 1-6.

Note: The above definition applies to tri-parametric solids only. MSC.Patran can also create

or import a B-rep solid, which is parameterized on the outer surface only, and not

within the interior. See B-rep Solid (p. 24) for more information.

V6

V5

V2

ξ3 V7

P

ξ2

z V1

V3

ξ1

x y V4

A solid generally has five or six sides or faces. (A B-rep solid can have more than six faces.)

The parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . At (0,0,0) P

is at V1 and at (1,1,1), P is at V7 .

CHAPTER 1 9

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-7.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2,ξ3)

(0,1,1) V6

(0,0,1) (1,1,1)

V5

ξ3 (1,0,1)

ξ2 ξ3 V7

ξ2

ξ1 (1,1,0)

V1

(0,0,0)

(1,0,0)

ξ1 V3

V4

z

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1

0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1

x y

0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ3 , shown in Eq. 1-5:

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 3 = T ξ3 Eq. 1-5

Where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction, T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2 direction,

and T ξ3 is the tangent vector in the ξ 3 direction.

At any point within a given solid, T ξ1 , T ξ2 and T ξ3 , which define the tangents and positive ξ 1 ,

ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions can be determined.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Topology

Topology identifies the kinds of items used to define adjacency relationships between geometric

entities.

Every curve, surface and solid in MSC.Patran has a defined set of topologic entities. You can

reference these entities when you build the geometry or analysis model. Examples of this

include:

• Creating a surface between edges of two surfaces.

• Meshing an edge or a face of a solid.

• Referencing a vertex of a curve, surface or solid to apply a loads/BC.

Topology is invariant through a one-to-one bicontinuous mapping transformation. This means

you can have two curves, surfaces or solids that have different parameterizations, but

topologically, they can be identical.

To illustrate this concept, Figure 1-8 shows three groups of surfaces A-D. Geometrically, they

are different, but topologically they are the same.

A

A

B

B C

D

D

D* C

A* B

Topologic Entities: Vertex, Edge, Face, Body. The types of topologic entities found in

MSC.Patran are the following:

vertex is separate from a geometric point, although a point can exist on a vertex.

Edge Defines the topologic curve on a surface or a solid. An edge is separate from a

geometric curve, although a curve can exist on an edge.

CHAPTER 1 1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Face Defines the topologic surface of a solid. A face is separate from a geometric surface,

although a surface can exist on a face.

Body A group of surfaces that forms a closed volume. A body is usually referenced as a B-

rep solid or a Volume solid, where only its exterior surfaces are parameterized. See

Solids (p. 24) for more information.

Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran. The connectivity for a curve,

surface and solid determines the order in which the internal vertex, edge and face IDs will be

assigned. The location of a geometric entity’s parametric axes defines the point where

assignment of the IDs for the entity’s vertices, edges and faces will begin.

Important: Generally, when modeling in MSC.Patran, you do not need to know the topologic

entities’ internal IDs. When you cursor select a topologic entity, such as an edge of

a surface, the ID will be displayed in the appropriate listbox on the form.

Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 show a four sided surface and a six sided solid with the internal

vertex, edge and face IDs displayed. If the connectivity changes, then the IDs of the vertices,

edges and faces will also change.

V7

ED7

F6 F2

V6 ED8

F4 ED12

ED5 V3 100

ED3 ED3

ED1 11 V5 F3

ED10 V4

ED2 F1

ξ2 F5 ED9

ξ3 ED4

V2

V1 ED4 V4 ED1 ξ1

ξ1 ξ2 V1

Figure 1-9 Vertex & Edge Numbering Figure 1-10 Face Numbering for a Solid

for a Surface

For example, in Figure 1-9, the edge, ED3, of Surface 11 would be displayed as:

Surface 11.3

Surface 11.3.1

The face, F1, of Solid 100 in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:

Solid 100.1

Solid 100.1.3

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The vertex, V6, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:

Solid 100.1.2.2

When meshing adjacent surfaces or solids, MSC.Patran requires the geometry be topologically

congruent so that coincident nodes will be created along the common boundaries.

Figure 1-11 shows an example where surfaces 1 through 3 are topologically incongruent and

surfaces 2 through 5 are topologically congruent. The outer vertices are shared for surfaces 1

through 3, but the inside edges are not. Surfaces 2 through 5 all have common edges, as well as

common vertices.

There are several ways to correct surfaces 1 through 3 to make them congruent. See Building a

Congruent Model (p. 31) for more information.

2 4 2

1

3 5

3

For a group of surfaces or solids to be congruent, the adjacent surfaces or solids must share

common edges, as well as common vertices.

(MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran software product required adjacent surfaces or solids

to share only the common vertices to be considered topologically congruent for meshing.)

CHAPTER 1 1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Figure 1-12. It shows a gap between two pairs of surfaces that is greater than the Global Model

Tolerance. This means when you mesh the surface pairs, coincident nodes will not be created

along both sides of the gap.

Incongruent Surfaces

Tolerance

• Use the Create/Surface/Match form. See Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270).

• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481).

For more information on meshing, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1)

in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

non-manufacturable. However, in analysis, non-manifold topology is sometimes either

necessary or desirable. Figure 1-13 shows a surface model with a non-manifold edge.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This case may be perfectly fine. A non-manifold edge has more than two surfaces or solid faces

connected to it. Therefore, two solids which share a common face also give non-manifold

geometry (both the common face and its edges are non-manifold).

In general, non-manifold topology is acceptable in MSC.Patran. The exception is in the creation

of a B-rep solid where a non-manifold edge is not allowed. The Verifying Surface Boundaries

(p. 698) option detects non-manifold edges as well as free edges.

CHAPTER 1 1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Connectivity

In Figure 1-2, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-6 in Parameterization (p. 5), the axes for the

parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , have a unique orientation and location on the curve, surface and

solid.

Depending on the orientation and location of the ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 axes, this defines a unique

connectivity for the curve, surface or solid.

For example, although the following two curves are identical, the connectivity is different for

each curve (note that the vertex IDs are reversed):

V2 V1

ξ1 ξ1

V1 V2

For a four sided surface, there are a total of eight possible connectivity definitions. Two possible

connectivities are shown in Figure 1-15. (Again, notice that the vertex and edge IDs are different

for each surface.)

V2 V3

ED1 ED2

ξ2 ED2 ED3

V1 V2

ξ1

V3 ξ2 ξ1

V4

ED4 ED1

ED3 ED4

V4 V1

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

For a tri-parametric solid with six faces, there are a total of 24 possible connectivity definitions

in MSC.Patran - three orientations at each of the eight vertices. Two possible connectivities are

shown in Figure 1-16.

V6 V6

V5 V5

V2

ξ3 V7

V2

ξ2

V8 V8 ξ3

ξ1

V1 V3 V1

ξ1 V3

ξ2

V4 V4

Plotting the Parametric Axes. MSC.Patran can plot the location and orientation of the

parametric axes for the geometric entities by turning on the Parametric Direction toggle on the

Geometric Properties form, under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. See

Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for

more information.

Modifying the Connectivity. For most geometric entities, you can modify the connectivity by

altering the orientation and/or location of the parametric axes by using the Geometry

application’s Edit action’s Reverse method. See Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).

For solids, you can also control the location of the parametric origin under the

Preferences/Geometry menu and choose either the MSC.Patran Convention button or the

PATRAN 2.5 Convention button for the Solid Origin Location.

CHAPTER 1 1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran

The geometry’s parameterization and connectivity affect the geometry and finite element

analysis model in the following ways:

Defines Order of Internal Topologic IDs. The parameterization and connectivity for a curve,

surface or solid define the order of the internal IDs of their topologic entities. MSC.Patran stores

these IDs internally and displays them when you cursor select a vertex, edge or face. See Vertex,

Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran (p. 11) for more information.

Defines Positive Surface Normals. Using right hand rule by crossing a surface’s ξ 1 direction

with its ξ 2 direction, it defines the surface’s positive normal direction ( ξ 3 direction). This affects

many areas of geometry and finite element creation, including creating B-rep solids. See

Building An Optimal Geometry Model (p. 30) for more information.

curve, surface or solid define the positive direction for a pressure load, and it defines the

surface’s top and bottom locations for an element variable pressure load. See Create Structural

LBCs Sets (p. 19) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more

information.

Helps Define Parametric Field Functions. If you reference a field function that was defined

in parametric space, when creating a varying loads/BC or a varying element or material

property, the loads/BC values or the property values will depend on the geometry’s

parameterization and the orientation of the parametric axes. See Fields Forms (p. 144) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information.

Defines Node and Element ID Order For IsoMesh. The MSC.Patran mapped mesher,

IsoMesh, will use the geometric entity’s parameterization and connectivity to define the order of

the node and element IDs and the element connectivity. (The parameterization and connectivity

will not be used if the mesh will have a transition or change in the number of elements within

the surface or solid.) See IsoMesh (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite

Element Modeling for more information.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran uses the Global Model Tolerance when it imports or accesses geometry, when it

creates geometry, or when it modifies existing geometry.

The Global Model Tolerance is found under the Preferences/Global menu. The default value is

0.005.

When creating geometry, if two points are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then

MSC.Patran will only create the first point and not the second.

This rule also applies to curves, surfaces and solids. If the points that describe two curves,

surfaces or solids are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then only the first curve,

surface or solid will be created, and not the second.

Important: For models with dimensions which vary significantly from 10 units, MSC

recommends you set the Global Model Tolerance to .05% of the maximum model

dimension.

For more information on the Global Model Tolerance, see (p. 57) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

CHAPTER 1 1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Generally, there are four types of geometry objects in MSC.Patran:1

• Point (default color is cyan)

• Parametric Curve (default color is yellow)

• Bi-Parametric Surface (default color is green)

• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)

MSC.Patran also can access, import, and create Trimmed Surfaces, B-rep Solids and Volume

Solids. See Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) and Solids (p. 24) for more information.

You also can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces and solids, which are recognized by the

PATRAN 2 neutral file. See Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) for more information.

For more information on the types of geometry that can be created, see Matrix of Geometry

Types Created (p. 27).

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on

the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Trimmed Surfaces

Trimmed surfaces are a special class of bi-parametric surfaces. Trimmed surfaces can be

accessed from an external CAD user file; they can be imported from an IGES or Express Neutral

file; and they can be created in MSC.Patran.

Unlike other types of bi-parametric surfaces, trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges,

and they can have one or more interior holes or cutouts.

Also, trimmed surfaces have an associated parent surface that is not displayed. A trimmed

surface is defined by identifying the closed active and inactive regions of the parent surface. This

parent surface defines the parameterization and curvature of the trimmed surface.

You can create three types of trimmed surfaces in MSC.Patran:1

• General Trimmed Surface (default color is magenta)

• Simply Trimmed Surface (default color is green)

• Composite Trimmed Surface (default is magenta)

• Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface (default color is green)

(Green is the default color for both a simply trimmed surface and a general, bi-parametric

surface.)

Important: Simply trimmed surfaces and ordinary composite trimmed surfaces can be

meshed with IsoMesh or Paver. General trimmed surfaces and composite

trimmed surfaces can only be meshed with Paver. See Meshing Surfaces with

IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite

Element Modeling for more information. Also note that some geometric operations

are not currently possible with a general trimmed surface, e.g., a general trimmed

surface can not be used to create a triparametric solid.

General Trimmed Surface. A general trimmed surface can have any number of outer edges

and any number of inner edges which describe holes or cutouts. These outer and inner edges are

defined by a closed loop of chained curves. (Chained curves can be created with the

Create/Curve/Chain form. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).) An example is shown in

Figure 1-17.

All general trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default

color of magenta.2

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on

the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

2The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on

the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

CHAPTER 1 2

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Inner Edges or

Holes

Simply Trimmed Surface. A simply trimmed surface can only have four outer edges. It cannot

have any inner edges, or holes or cutouts. A simply trimmed surface reparametrizes the

bounded region of the parent and is called an overparametrization. An example is shown in

Figure 1-18. (A simply trimmed surface can have three sides, with one of the four edges

degenerating to a zero length edge.)

Like a general trimmed surface, a simply trimmed surface’s outer edges are defined by a closed

loop of chained curves. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).

All simply trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default

color of green. 1

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on

the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Sometimes a three of four sided region which define a trimmed surface will be created as a

general trimmed surface instead. This occurs when the overparametrization distorts the

bounded region of the parent to such an extent that it would be difficult to mesh and use for

analysis.

Composite Trimmed Surface. The composite trimmed surface is a kind of supervisor surface

that allows a collection of surfaces to be considered as one surface defined within a specific

boundary. This surface can also have holes in it. Evaluations on the composite trimmed surface

is similar to evaluations on the MSC.Patran trim surface (General Trimmed Surface). The big

difference is that it is three to five times slower than ordinary surfaces.

The composite trimmed surface should be considered a tool. Once the surface is built, it is a

single entity, yet processes on multiple surfaces, relieving the applications of the task of

determining where and when to move from one surface to another.

APPLICATION: The composite trimmed surface supervisor is a bounded PLANAR trim surface.

It acquires its name from the type of service it performs. Let us, for a moment, consider the

composite trimmed surface to be a cloud in the sky. The sun, being the light source behind the

cloud, creating a shadow on planet earth only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true

with the composite trimmed surface, except a view vector is given to determine the light

direction. “Under Surfaces” replace planet earth. The valid region on the “Under Surfaces” is

defined by where the outline of the composite trimmed surface appears.

CHAPTER 1 2

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

STEPS_BUILDING: There are three basic steps in building a composite trimmed surface.

Step 1 Creating the outer perimeter curve. In most cases this is a MSC.Patran curve

chain entity.

Step 2 Selecting an acceptable view direction for the view vector and planar

Composite trimmed surface entity. The view vector is the most important

aspect of building a composite trimmed surface. The resulting view vector

must yield only one intersection solution at any position on the “Under

Surfaces”. The user must select the proper view for the location of the

composite trimmed surface with some forethought and eliminate the

possibility of any of the underlying surfaces wrapping around in back of one

another. In some cases this may not be possible! The user must then create

more than one composite trimmed surface.

Additionally, since the composite trimmed surface supervisor is PLANAR, it

cannot encompass more than a 180 degree field of view. An example of this

would be a cylindrically shaped group of surfaces. It would probably take

three properly placed composite trimmed surface to represent it; one for every

120 degrees of rotation.

Step 3 Determines which currently displayed surfaces will be become part of the

composite trimmed surface domain (“Under Surfaces”). The user may

individually select the correct underlying surfaces or, if wanting to select all

visible surfaces, the user must place into “ERASE” all surfaces which might

cause multiple intersections and then select the remaining visible surfaces.

RULES:

1. The composite trimmed surface domain must not encompass any dead space. If any

portion has a vacancy (no “Under Surface” under it), unpredictable results will occur.

2. Processing along the view vector must yield a single intersection solution at any

position on the underlying surfaces within the composite trimmed surface’s domain.

Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface. The only difference between an Ordinary Composite

Trimmed Surface and the Composite Trimmed Surface is that this type will have only four edges

comprising the outer loop and no inner loops.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Solids

There are three types of solids that can be accessed or imported, or created in MSC.Patran:1

• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)

• B-rep Solid (default color is white)

• Volume Solid (default color is pink or light red)

on (p. 2) lists the types of solids created with each Geometry Application method.

Tri-Parametric Solid. All solids in MSC.Patran, except for B-rep solids and volume solids, are

tri-parametric solids. Tri-parametric solids are parameterized on the surface, as well as inside

the solid. Tri-parametric solids can only have four to six faces with no interior voids or holes.

Tri-parametric solids can be meshed with IsoMesh or TetMesh.

Important: IsoMesh will create hexagonal elements if the solid has five or six faces, but some

wedge elements will be created for the five faced solid. IsoMesh will create a

tetrahedron mesh for a four faced solid. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.

B-rep Solid. A B-rep solid is formed from a group of topologically congruent surfaces that

define a completely closed volume. Only its outer surfaces or faces are parameterized and not

the interior. An example is shown in Figure 1-19.

The group of surfaces that define the B-rep solid are its shell. A B-rep shell defines the exterior

of the solid, as well as any interior voids or holes. Shells can be composed of bi-parametric

surfaces and/or trimmed surfaces.

B-rep solids can be created with the Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary

Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) on using the form.

B-rep solids are meshed with TetMesh. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information.

1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on

the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

CHAPTER 1 2

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Parametric cubic geometry is a special class of parameterized geometry. Parametric cubic

geometry is supported in MSC.Patran by the PATRAN 2 neutral file and the IGES file for import

and export.

You have the option to create parametric cubic curves, bi-parametric cubic surfaces and tri-

parametric cubic solids, by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button found on most

Geometry application forms.

Important: Unless you intend to export the geometry using the PATRAN 2 neutral file, in

most situations, you do not need to press the PATRAN 2 Convention button to

create parametric cubic geometry.

Parametric cubic geometry can also be created in MSC.Patran, which are referred to as “grids”,

“lines”, “patches” and “hyperpatches.”

Parametric cubic geometry is defined by a parametric cubic equation. For example, a parametric

cubic curve is represented by the following cubic equation:

3 2

Z ( ξ1 ) = S1 ξ1 + S2 ξ1 + S3 ξ1 + S4 Eq. 1-6

where Z ( ξ 1 ) represents the general coordinate of the global coordinates X,Y, and Z; S 1 , S 2 , S 3 ,

and S 4 are arbitrary constants; and ξ 1 is a parameter in the range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .

For more information on parametric cubic geometry, see MSC.Patran Reference Manual.

There are some limitations on parametric cubic geometry.

Limits on Types of Curvature. There are limits to the types of curvature or shapes that are

allowed for a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid (see Figure 1-20).

Eq. 1-7 and Eq. 1-8 below represent the first and second derivatives of Eq. 1-6:

2

Z′ ( ξ 1 ) = 3S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 ξ 1 + S 3 Eq. 1-7

Z″ ( ξ 1 ) = 6S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 Eq. 1-8

Eq. 1-7 shows that a parametric cubic curve can only have two points with zero slope and Eq. 1-

8 shows that it can only have one point of inflection, as shown in Figure 1-20.

NO NO

YES NO

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Limits on Accuracy of Subtended Arcs. When you subtend an arc using a parametric cubic

curve, surface or solid, the difference between the true arc radius and the arc radius calculated

by the parametric cubic equation will increase. That is, as the angle of a subtended arc for a

parametric cubic entity increases, the accuracy of the entity from the true representation of the

arc decreases.

Figure 1-21 shows that as the subtended angle of a parametric cubic entity increases, the percent

error also increases substantially beyond 75 degrees.

When creating arcs with parametric cubic geometry, MSC recommends using Figure 1-21 to

determine the maximum arc length and its percent error that is acceptable to you.

For example, if you create an arc length of 90 degrees, it will have an error of 0.0275% from the

true arc length.

For most geometry models, MSC recommends arc lengths represented by parametric cubic

geometry should be 90 degrees or less. For a more accurate model, the parametric cubic arc

lengths should be 30 degrees or less.

3.0

Percent Error in the Radius (x 10-2)

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0

0 15 30 45 60 75 90

Total Subtended Angle in Degrees

Figure 1-21 Maximum Percent Error for Parametric Cubic Arc

CHAPTER 1 2

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

All Geometry Application forms use the following Object menu terms:

• Point

• Curve

• Surface

• Solid

• Plane

• Vector

• Coordinate Frame

MSC.Patran will create a specific geometric type of the parametric curve, bi-parametric surface

and tri-parametric solid based on the method used for the Create action or Edit action.

Table 1-1, and list the types of geometry created for each Create or Edit action method. The

tables also list if each method can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids by pressing

the PATRAN 2 Convention button on the application form. (Parametric cubic geometry is

recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file for export.)

For more information on each Create or Edit action method, see Overview of Geometry Create

Action (p. 70) and/or Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).

Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran

PATRAN 2

Create or Edit Method Type of Curve Convention?

(Parametric Cubic)

XYZ Parametric Cubic Not Applicable

Arc3Point Arc Yes

2D Arc2Point Arc Yes

2D Arc3Point Arc Yes

2D Circle Circle Yes

Conic Parametric Cubic N/A

Extract Curve On Surface Yes

Fillet Parametric Cubic N/A

Fit Parametric Cubic N/A

Intersect PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes

Involute Parametric Cubic N/A

Normal Parametric Cubic N/A

2D Normal Parametric Cubic N/A

2D ArcAngles Arc Yes

Point Parametric Cubic N/A

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

PATRAN 2

Create or Edit Method Type of Curve Convention?

(Parametric Cubic)

Project Curve On Surface Yes

PWL Parametric Cubic N/A

Revolve Arc Yes

Spline, Loft Spline option PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes

Spline, B-Spline option PieceWise Rational Polynomial Yes

Spline, B-Spline option NURB* Yes

TanCurve Parametric Cubic N/A

TanPoint Parametric Cubic N/A

Chain Composite Curve No

Manifold Curve On Surface Yes

* NURB splines are created if the NURBS Accelerator toggle is pressed OFF (default is

ON) on the Geometry Preferences form, found under the Preferences/Geometry menu.

This is true whether you create the spline in MSC.Patran or if you import the spline from

an IGES file. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. If the NURBS Accelerator is ON, PieceWise

Rational Polynomial splines will be created instead.

PATRAN 2

Create or Edit Method Type of Surface Convention?

(Parametric Cubic)

XYZ Parametric Bi-Cubic Not Applicable

Curve Curve Interpolating Surface Yes

Decompose Trimmed Surface Yes

Edge Generalized Coons Surface Yes

Extract Surface On Solid Yes

Extrude Extruded Surface Yes

Fillet Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A

Glide Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A

Match Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A

Normal Sweep Normal Surface N/A

Revolve Surface of Revolution Yes

CHAPTER 1 2

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

PATRAN 2

Create or Edit Method Type of Surface Convention?

(Parametric Cubic)

Ruled Ruled Surface No

Vertex Curve Interpolating Surface Yes

Trimmed (Surface Option) Trimmed Surface No

Trimmed (Planar Option) Trimmed Surface No

Trimmed (Composite Composite Trimmed Surface No

Option)

PATRAN 2

Create or Edit Method Type of Solid Convention?

(Parametric Cubic)

XYZ Parametric Tri-Cubic Not Applicable

Extrude Extruded Solid Yes

Face Solid 5Face, Solid 6Face Yes

Glide Glide Solid Yes

Normal Sweep Normal Solid Yes

Revolve Solid of Revolution Yes

Surface Surface Interpolating Solid Yes

Vertex Parametric Tri-Cubic N/A

B-rep Ordinary Body No

Decompose Tri-Parametric Yes

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

A well defined geometry model simplifies the building of the optimal finite element analysis

model. A poorly defined geometry model complicates, or in some situations, makes it

impossible to build or complete the analysis model.

In computer aided engineering (CAE) analysis, most geometry models do not consist of neatly

trimmed, planar surfaces or solids. In some situations, you may need to modify the geometry to

build a congruent model, create a set of degenerate surfaces or solids, or decompose a trimmed

surface or B-rep solid.

The following sections will explain how to:

• Build a congruent model.

• Verify and align surface normals.

• Build trimmed surfaces.

• Decompose trimmed surfaces into three- or four-sided surfaces.

• Build a B-rep solid.

• Build degenerate surfaces or solids.

CHAPTER 1 3

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran requires adjacent surfaces or solids be topologically congruent so that the nodes will

be coincident at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)

for more information.

For example, Figure 1-22 shows surfaces 1, 2 and 3 which are incongruent. When meshing with

Isomesh or Paver, MSC.Patran cannot guarantee the nodes will coincide at the edges shared by

surfaces 1, 2 and 3.

• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form with the Surface-Point option. See Matching

Surface Edges (p. 481) on using the form.

• Or, break surface 1 with the Edit/Surface/Break form. See Surface Break Options

(p. 457) on using the form.

The following describes the method of using the Edit/Surface/Break form.

To make surfaces 1 through 3 congruent, we will break surface 1 into surfaces 4 and 5, as shown

in Figure 1-23:

4 2

5

3

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

◆ Geometry

Action: Edit

Object: Surface

Method: Break

Option: Point

after the break.

Break Point List Point 10 Cursor select or enter the ID for point 10,

as shown in Figure 1-24.

Since Auto Execute is ON, we do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Cursor select

Surface 1 for the

Surface List on 2

the form.

1

10 Cursor select Point

10 for the Point List

on the form.

3

CHAPTER 1 3

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Building optimal surfaces will save time and it will result in a better idealized finite element

analysis model of the design or mechanical part.

Optimal surfaces consist of a good overall shape with no sharp corners, and whose normal is

aligned in the same direction with the other surfaces in the model.

Avoid ing Sharp Corners. In general, MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) recommends that

you avoid sharp inside corners when creating surfaces. That is, you should generally try to keep

the inside corners of the surfaces to 45 degrees or more.

The reason is that when you mesh surfaces with quadrilateral elements, the shapes of the

elements are determined by the overall shape of the surface, see Figure 1-25. The more skewed

the quadrilateral elements are, the less reasonable your analysis results might be.

Note: You can use the surface display lines to predict what the surface element shapes will

look like before meshing. You can increase or decrease the number of display lines

under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometric Attributes

(p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

For further recommendations, please consult the vendor documentation for your finite element

analysis code.

1 1

2

4 2

4

3

3

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

determine the positive normal direction for each surface by using right hand rule and crossing

the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes of a surface. Depending on the surface’s connectivity, each

surface could have different normal directions, as shown in Figure 1-26.

ξ1

ξ2

ξ2

ξ1

Important: In general, you should try to maintain the same normal direction for all surfaces

in a model.

The normal direction of a surface affects finite element applications, such defining the positive

pressure load direction, the top and bottom surface locations for a variable pressure load, and

the element connectivity.

Use the Edit/Surface/Reverse form to display the surface normal vectors, and to reverse or align

the normals for a group of surfaces. See Reversing Surfaces (p. 501) on using the form.

CHAPTER 1 3

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Example of Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals. For example, Figure 1-27 shows a

group of eight surfaces that we want to display the normal vectors, and if necessary, reverse or

align the normals. To display the surface normals without reversing, do the following:

◆ Geometry

Action: Edit

Object: Surface

Method: Reverse

Surface List Surface 1:8 Make sure you turn Auto Execute OFF

before cursor selecting surfaces 1-8.

Draw Normal Vectors And do not press Apply. Apply will

reverse the normals.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

You should see red arrows drawn on each surface which represent the surface normal vectors,

as shown in Figure 1-28.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

-Apply-

Draw Normal Vectors This will plot the updated normal vector

directions.

Figure 1-29 shows the updated normal directions which are now aligned.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

CHAPTER 1 3

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Trimmed surfaces are preferred for modeling a complex part with many sides. However, there

may be areas in your model where you may want to decompose, or break, a trimmed surface

into a series of three or four sided surfaces.

One reason is that you want to mesh the surface area with IsoMesh instead of Paver. (IsoMesh

can only mesh surfaces that have three or four edges.) Another reason is that you want to create

tri-parametric solids from the decomposed three or four sided surfaces and mesh with IsoMesh.

To decompose a trimmed surface, use the Geometry application’s Create/Surface/Decompose

form. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 255) on using the form.

When entered in the Create/Surface/Decompose form, the select menu that appears at the

bottom of the screen will show the following icons:

the order listed. If not point or vertex is found, the point closest to edge will be used

or a point will be projected onto the surface.

Use cursor select or directly input an existing point on the surface. If point is not on

the surface, it will be projected onto the surface.

Example. Figure 1-30 shows trimmed surface 4 with seven edges. We will decompose surface

4 into four four-sided surfaces.

20

21

26

25

24 22

23

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Our first decomposed surface will be surface 3, as shown in Figure 1-31. The figure shows

surface 3 cursor defined by three vertex locations and one point location along an edge. The

point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

4

Use

Use

to cursor select

to cursor select this point

these three location along

vertices. the edge.

Figure 1-32 shows the remaining decomposed surfaces 5, 6 and 7 and the select menu icons

used to cursor define the surfaces. Again, the point locations can be selected in a clockwise or

counterclockwise direction.

Use

to cursor select this

Use point along the edge

to cursor select these for Surface 5.

three vertices for

Surface 5.

5

6 Use

Use to cursor select these

to cursor select these four vertices for

three vertices for Surface 7.

Surface 6.

Use

to cursor select this

point along the edge

for Surface 6.

CHAPTER 1 3

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

Use Surface Display Lines as a Guide. Generally, the surface display lines are a good guide

to where the trimmed surface can be decomposed. MSC recommends increasing the display

lines to four or more. The display lines are controlled under the menus Display/Display

Properties/Geometric. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Boundary represented (B-rep) solids are created by using the Geometry application’s

Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) for

more information on the form.

There are three rules to follow when you create a B-rep solid in MSC.Patran:

1. The group of surfaces that will define the B-rep solid must fully enclose a volume.

2. The surfaces must be topologically congruent. That is, the adjacent surfaces must share

a common edge.

3. The normal surface directions for the exterior shell must all point outward, as shown

in Figure 1-33. That is, the normals must point away from the material of the body.

This will be done automatically during creation as long as rules 1 and 26 are satisfied.

B-rep solids created in MSC.Patran can only be meshed with TetMesh.

Important: At this time, MSC.Patran can only create a B-rep solid with an exterior shell, and

no interior shells.

9

8

4 7

3 10

1

6

2 5

Y Z

1

X

CHAPTER 1 4

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

A bi-parametric surface can degenerate from four edges to three edges. A tri-parametric solid

can degenerate from six faces to four or five faces (a tetrahedron or a wedge, respectively).

The following describes the best procedures for creating a degenerate triangular surface and a

degenerate tetrahedron and a wedge shaped solid.

Important: IsoMesh will create hexahedron elements only, if the solid has six faces. Some

wedge elements will be created for a solid with five faces. IsoMesh will create

tetrahedron elements only, for a solid with four faces. TetMesh will create

tetrahedron elements only, for all shaped solids.

Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle). There are two ways you can create a degenerate,

three-sided surface:

• Use the Create/Surface/Edge form with the 3 Edge option. See Creating Surfaces

from Edges (Edge Method) (p. 257) on using the form.

• Or, use the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. See Creating

Surfaces Between 2 Curves (p. 240) on using the form.

Figure 1-34 illustrates the method of using the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve

option. Notice that the apex of the surface is defined by a zero length curve by using the Curve

select menu icon shown in Figure 1-34.

edge or curve for the Starting or Ending Curve List.

Starting or Ending

Curve List.

Four Sided Solid (Tetrahedron). A four sided (tetrahedron) solid can be created by using the

Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option, where the starting surface is defined by a

point for the apex of the tetrahedron, and the ending surface is an opposing surface or face, as

shown in Figure 1-35.

Five Sided Solid (Pentahedron). A five sided (pentahedron) solid can be created by using:

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

• The Create/ Solid/Face form with the 5 Face option. See Creating Solids from Faces

(p. 343) on using the form.

• The Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option. See Creating Solids from

Surfaces (Surface Method) (p. 327) on using the form.

Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37 illustrate using the Create/Solid/Surface form to create the

pentahedron and a wedge.

highlight and

select this point twice for the

first edge of the surface.

Highlight again,

point twice again.

Ending Surface List.

highlight and

select this point twice for the

first edge of the surface.

Highlight again,

point twice again.

Ending Surface List.

CHAPTER 1 4

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

highlight

select this curve twice.

Ending Surface List.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

Accessing, Importing & Exporting

2 Geometry

■ Overview

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

2.1 Overview

MSC.Patran can access geometry from an external CAD system user file. Geometry can also be

imported (or read) from a PATRAN 2 Neutral file or from an IGES file. MSC.Patran can export

(or write) some or all geometry to an external PATRAN 2 Neutral file or IGES file.

Geometry can be accessed or imported into the user database either by using the File/Import

menus or by using the File/CAD Model Access menus on the MSC.Patran main form. Geometry

can be exported from the database using the File/Export menus.

For more information on executing the File/Import and File/Export forms, see Importing

Models (p. 26) and Export (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

For more information on accessing CAD models, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD

Geometry (p. 47).

For more information on import and export support of geometry for the PATRAN 2 Neutral file,

see PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57).

For more information on which IGES entities are supported by MSC.Patran for importing and

exporting, see Supported IGES Entity Types - Import (p. 51) and Supported IGES Entity

Types -Export (p. 116) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

CHAPTER 2 4

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

MSC.Patran can directly access geometry from an external CAD file for the following CAD

systems that are listed in Table 2-1.

This unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature allows you to access the CAD geometry and

its topology that are contained in the CAD file. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build

upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads

and boundary conditions as well as the element properties directly to the geometry.

You can execute a specific MSC.Patran CAD Access module by using the File/Importing Models

menus on the main form. See Importing Models (p. 26) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.

For more information on using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, see Importing Pro/ENGINEER

Files (p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files

(p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Table 2-1 Supported CAD Systems and Their MSC.Patran CAD Access Modules

Supported CAD System

Module *

EDS/Unigraphics MSC.Patran Unigraphics

* Each MSC.Patran CAD Access module must be licensed before you can access the appro-

priate external CAD file. You can find out which MSC.Patran products are currently li-

censed by pressing the MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) icon on the main form, and

then pressing the License button on the form that appears.

If MSC.Patran Unigraphics is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an

external EDS/Unigraphics part file.

• Unigraphics part file can be accessed in MSC.Patran using one of two methods. The

first method is express file based import. The second method is direct parasolid

transmit file based import. In both cases, Unigraphics geometry is imported and stored

in a MSC.Patran database.

• MSC.Patran uses the original geometry definitions of the accessed entities, without any

approximations. Parasolid evaluators are directly used for entities imported via the

direct parasolid method.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

• CAD Access filters are provided that can be selected based on the defined

EDS/Unigraphics entity types, levels, and layers.

• You can automatically create MSC.Patran groups when accessing the geometry based

on the defined entity types, levels, or layers.

For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files

(p. 128) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Tips For Accessing EDS/Unigraphics Geometry for Express File Based Import

1. When you execute EDS/Unigraphics, make sure the solid to be accessed is

topologically congruent with no gaps (see Figure 2-1). For more information, see

Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12).

Verify that the edges of the solid’s adjacent faces share the same end points or vertices,

and that there are no gaps between the faces.

2. You can improve MSC.Patran Unigraphics’ performance by reducing the number of

entities to be processed by using the Entity Type filter on the MSC.Patran Import form

and unselect or un-highlight all entities of a particular type that you do not want, before

you access the part file. For example, you can unselect the entity type, “Bounded-

Plane”, to eliminate all bounded plane entities. For the direct parasolid import option,

the entity type filter can be used for wire body/sheet body/solid body only.

3. Put those entities in EDS/Unigraphics that you want to access into specific layers. Then

select to only those layers in the MSC.Patran Import form before importing the part.

4. Make sure the MSC.Patran Global Model Tolerance is reset to an appropriate value if

you will be accessing long thin surfaces and solids with small dimensions (default is

0.005). For example, set the tolerance value so that it is smaller than the smallest edge

length (greater than 10.0E-6) in the model. This will improve model usability on some

models.

Face 2 Face 2

(lacking congruent edge) (with congruent edge)

CHAPTER 2 4

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

Tips For Accessing Parasolid Geometry. This section provides helpful hints and

recommendations regarding the usage of MSC.Patran as it pertains to Parasolid integration.

Disassembling The Edit/Solid/Disassemble function in the Geometry Application can

Solids be used to create simply trimmed surfaces (green 4-sided) with one

command. This can be a big timesaver if the B-rep Solid is being

disassembled to eventually create tri-parametric solids (blue) for Hex

meshing. This command will convert all 4-sided B-rep Solid faces into

simply trimmed surfaces (green) which then can be used to construct

tri-parametric solids.

Solids Break If difficulties are encountered in breaking a solid:

1. First disassemble the original solid (Edit/Solid/Disassemble).

2. Try to reconstruct a new solid using Create/Solid/B-rep. If

this is unsuccessful due to gaps between surfaces, use the

Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. If a solid is created, continue

with the break operation.

3. If steps (a) and (b) were unsuccessful:

• Break the trimmed surfaces from the disassembled solid (step (a)).

If this operation is slow, refit the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit)

before the break operation.

• Create the additional surfaces in the interior required to enclose

the individual solid volumes.

• Create the new individual solids using Create/Solid/B-rep. If the

B-rep can not be created due to surface gaps, use

Edit/Surface/Sew and try again.

Global Model After successful access of Unigraphics geometry via the Parasolid

Tolerance Direct method, the Global Model Tolerance will be set relative to the

models geometric characteristics. This tolerance is the recommended

tolerance for MSC.Patran applications to use for best results.

Solids - Group transform for solids is not supported. For information about

Group Transform transforming solids in pre-release format, see (p. 50).

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Meshing Guidelines

Hybrid The Hybrid tetmesher only accepts global edge lengths for mesh criteria if

TetMesher - attempting to directly mesh a solid. If you encounter difficulties, decrease

Global Edge the global edge length.

Lengths

Hybrid The Hybrid tetmesher does not write nodes that lie on solid edges into the

TetMesher - mesh seed table. This limits the ability of the Hybrid tetmesher to recognize

Mesh Control existing meshes. For example, if your requirements are: (1) to match

adjacent meshes (i.e., multiple solids); (2) that the mesh be able to recognize

a hard curve/point; or (3) to define mesh seed prior to solid meshing,

follow these steps:

• Define any desired hard points/curves and mesh seeds.

• Surface mesh the geometry using the paver, creating triangular

elements which completely enclose the desired geometric volume.

• Invoke the Hybrid tetmesher, using the previously created triangular

elements as input.

Paver If the paver exhibits difficulties meshing some geometry or making

congruent meshes:

• Delete any existing mesh on the problematic geometry.

• Perform an Edit/Surface/Refit.

• Do an Edit/Surface/Edge Match if congruency is an issue.

• Mesh again.

CHAPTER 2 5

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

Solids - Group Group transform for solids is not supported. If a transformed solid is

Transform required, consider the following alternatives: (1) Perform the

transformation in the native CAD system and then again access the

desired geometry in MSC.Patran; (2) Enable an environment variable

before executing MSC.Patran. At the system prompt, type:

setenv P3_UG_ENTITY_FILTER 1

which allows the transformation of Parasolid solid geometry and perform

the transformation. If a solid is successfully constructed, continue as

planned. If not, either:

• Mesh the original solid and transform the resulting finite element

mesh, with the limitation being that element properties and

loads/boundary conditions will have to be assigned directly to the

finite elements; or

• Try to reconstruct a B-rep solid from the constituent surfaces that

result from the transformation, by first using Geometry tools such as

Edit/Surface/Sew, Edit/Surface/Edge Match, etc., to reconnect the

surfaces and then use Create/Solid/B-rep.

• Initially access the original geometry (Unigraphics only) using the

Express Translation method. If a solid is successfully imported, a

transformation of the geometry is supported.

Surface Unigraphics does not automatically enforce surface congruency.

Congruency Typically, CAE applications require congruent meshes; therefore,

geometric surfaces must usually be congruent. Accessing geometry

through Parasolid simply retrieves the Unigraphics geometry exactly

as it is defined; an explicit action must be taken to sew geometric

surfaces, otherwise they will not be congruent.

It is recommended that models with surfaces be sewn up in

Unigraphics prior to access by MSC.Patran. MSC.Patran offers the

ability to also invoke the Unigraphics surface sew tool; in fact, this is

the default operation when accessing Sheet Bodies.

Unigraphics Sew “Unigraphics Sew” and “Verify Boundary” toggles are, by default, ON

With Verify During during import. The Verification entails placement of markers at all

Geometry Access incongruent surface edges, thus allowing a user to quickly identify

whether the Unigraphics Sew was completely (or partially) successful.

The markers may be removed using the Broom icon.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Problem MSC.Patran detects three different types of anomalies during

Unigraphics Unigraphics part file import:

Entities From a) Suspect939 Entities: Sometimes Unigraphics needs to take special

Import actions to convert surfaces from earlier version parts. These surfaces

are attributed with “Suspect939.” Although for the most part these

surfaces are usable, Unigraphics recommends that these surfaces be

replaced. As such, MSC.Patran will not attempt to include these

surfaces in the Unigraphics sewing, and we recommend that these

surfaces be refitted once imported into MSC.Patran. You will find

these surfaces in a group named, <model_name>_UG_SUSPECT.

b) Invalid Entities: Before importing the Unigraphics model,

MSC.Patran will check each surface and curve entities to ensure

consistency and validity. Occasionally, some entities do not pass the

checks. These invalid entities will be excluded from both UG sewing

and MSC.Patran import. If you see such a message in the invoke

window, you should go back to UG to ensure the model is valid. Please

reference the next section, Unigraphics Model Checks (p. 52) for

steps to do this check. One recommended way is to refit/reconstruct

the surface in Unigraphics and then reimport it into MSC.Patran.

If UG sewing is turned on for the MSC.Patran import, there is a chance

that invalid entities are created by the UG sew. These entities will be

brought into MSC.Patran and put into a group named,

<model_name>_UG_INVALID. As there is no guarantee that entities

in this group will work with any applications, we strongly recommend

you first commit/save the MSC.Patran database and then reconstruct

these bodies if possible.

c) Gap Surfaces: Sometimes surfaces, that are degenerate or are/close

to being zero area, appear in the model. These surfaces are called “gap

surfaces.” If there are any such gap surfaces, they will be in a group

named, <model_name>_GAP_SURFACE. Please inspect the imported

model and determine if these gap surfaces should be removed from the

model.

Unigraphics Unigraphics provides geometry evaluation tools which are extremely

Model Checks useful in judging the quality of a model. Here are some

geometry/topology checks Unigraphics can perform and provide

results with any UG part: (1) In Unigraphics V13.0, “Info” is available

at the top menu bar, under Info/Analysis/Examine Geometry. If you

use this on surfaces and any are ill-defined, they will be flagged as

“suspect”. (2) In Unigraphics V13.0, Info is available at the top menu

bar. To run all checks:

• Use Info->Analysis->Examine Geometry...

• Choose “Set All Checks”, then “OK”.

• Choose “Select All” to check the entire model currently selectable.

NOTE: Default Distance tolerance is 0.001 units and Default Angle

tolerance is 0.5 units.

CHAPTER 2 5

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

MSC.Patran In addition to accessing the Unigraphics surface sew tool, MSC.Patran

Surface Sew offers an additional capability to sew surfaces beyond what

Unigraphics supports (e.g., resolution of T-edges). If the Unigraphics

surface sew does not resolve all incongruences, try using the

MSC.Patran surface sew as well. This capability can be accessed

through Edit/Surface/Sew in the Geometry application. If both the

Unigraphics and MSC.Patran surface sew tools cannot remove all of

the gaps and incongruencies, then two options are available. The first

option is to refit all of the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit). Sometimes,

after this operation, these surfaces can be sewn together

(Edit/Surface/Sew).

The other option for sewing the model using MSC.Patran surface

sewing is to increase the global tolerance in MSC.Patran and sew the

model again. Changing the global tolerance in MSC.Patran is generally

not recommended, but in this case may be necessary. The necessity of

increasing the global tolerance is determined by checking the

incongruent edges of the model (Verify/Surface/Boundary) to see if

they share vertices, or by the gap closure operation when gaps cannot

be closed between surface since the edge curves are too far apart. The

tolerance value should be set to a value just larger than the distance

between the vertices to be equivalenced (vertices which should be

shared at the ends of incongruent curves), or just larger than the

“allowable gap closure tolerance” which is issued by the sewing (or

edge match) operation.

(Note that there are cases where sewing will report that gaps exist

which are not really gaps. This is because the operation of checking for

gaps does not necessarily know about the engineering intent of the

model. We suggest that the user check the gaps reported to make sure

that they are gaps. Furthermore, we suggest that the global tolerance

be increased conservatively, e.g., double the tolerance instead of

increasing it by an order of magnitude.)

Refitting The technique of refitting geometry has been identified as a potentially

Geometry viable method of removing problematic geometry that prevents

subsequent meshing, application of LBC’s, editing, transforming, etc.

Edit/Curve/Refit and Edit/Surface/Refit are available under the

Geometry application. These functions will more regularly

parameterize poorly parameterized geometry (for surfaces, this

typically involves those with compound curvature), which can

currently lead to difficulties in successfully building CAE models.

Congruency and boundary definitions are retained.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Edit/Surface/Refit As previously mentioned, the Edit/Surface/Refit function in the

Geometry application can be used to successfully handle problematic

Sheet Body geometry. The situations where this applies include:

• Accessing geometry with the Unigraphics Sew option disabled

with subsequent attempts to make the surfaces congruent by

using MSC.Patran’s surface sew, edge match, etc.

• Difficulties rendering, meshing, edge matching, disassembling,

transforming, etc.

• Surfaces that result from disassembling solid geometry (i.e., for

regioning).

Curves Wire Bodies coincident with Sheet Body and Solid Body edges are not

Coincident With equivalenced. This is a different behavior from what occurs if the

Surface and Solid “Express Translation” method is used. If coincident curves are not

Edges detected by the user, they may, for example, apply a Loads/Boundary

Condition to what they believe is a surface or solid edge, when in fact

they are applying it to a curve. To avoid this situation:

• Move all Wire Bodies to a separate group and post only when

required.

• If Wire Bodies are accessed, use the new Geometry function

Edit/Point/Equivalence to connect the curve and surface/solid

vertices.

• Disable access of Wire Bodies and only access when needed.

CHAPTER 2 5

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

If MSC.Patran ProENGINEER is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from

an external Pro/ENGINEER part file.

You can execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER either from MSC.Patran or from Pro/ENGINEER

by doing one of the following:

ProENGINEER from MSC.Patran by using the File/Import... menu and make sure the

Pro/ENGINEER button is pressed on the Import form. See Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files

(p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions for more information.

Important: Make sure MSC.Patran ProENGINEER has been properly installed by following

the instructions in Selecting Products (Ch. 3) in the MSC.Patran Installation and

Operations Guide.

1. Execute Pro/ENGINEER by entering:

p3_proe

p3_proe will ask for the command name to run Pro/ENGINEER. Press <CR> if you

want to accept the default command pro.

Enter the command name for running Pro/ENGINEER.

[pro]?: <cr>

2. Open the Pro/ENGINEER assembly file or part file. Then, select the Pro/ENGINEER

menus in the following order:

File

Export

Model

Patran Geom

The MSC.Patran menu will list four options:

Filter

Run MSC.Patran

Create .db

Create .geo

You can select any one of the above four options.

If Filter is selected:

• A menu appears which allows the user to select:

Datum Points

Datum Curves

Datum Surfaces

Datum Planes

Coordinate System Datums

for output to the intermediated .geo file. (Default = no datum entities).

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the

current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.

• MSC.Patran will automatically be executed and a database will be created and

opened.

• The MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file containing the

Pro/ENGINEER geometry will be loaded into the MSC.Patran database, and

both Pro/ENGINEER and MSC.Patran will remain executing.

If Create .db is selected:

• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the

current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.

• A batch job will be submitted in background mode that will:

One, execute MSC.Patran and create and open a database.

Two, load the.geo file into the MSC.Patran database.

And, three, close the database and exit MSC.Patran.

If Create .geo is selected, a MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be

created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.

For more information on the MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file, see Executing

MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER (p3_proe) (p. 122) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

CHAPTER 2 5

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

Geometry

The PATRAN 2 Neutral file is supported by MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran.

With the PATRAN 2 neutral file, MSC.Patran can import or export only parametric cubic

geometry by executing the File/Import menus on the main form.

MSC.Patran cannot export non-parametric cubic geometry using the PATRAN 2 Neutral file.

Instead, you may use export the entire geometry model using the IGES file.

Depending on Geometry application methods used to create the geometry, you may or may not

be able to create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids. Also, some geometry Create action

methods can generate only parametric cubic geometry.

For information on how to import or export a PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see Importing PATRAN

2.5 Neutral Files (p. 76) and Exporting a PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

For the definition of parametric cubic geometry, see Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25).

For information on what types of curves, surfaces and solids you can create in MSC.Patran, see

Table 1-1, and starting on (p. 27).

For more information on how to export an IGES file, see Exporting an IGES File (p. 115) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

Coordinate Frames

3

■ Coordinate Frame Definitions

Frames

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran can create and support three types of coordinate frames:

• Rectangular (X,Y,Z)

• Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z)

• Spherical (R, Theta, Phi)

MSC.Patran also has a default global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Coord 0 is the

default reference coordinate frame for many application forms (which can be changed to another

coordinate frame). Also, Coord 0 cannot be deleted, even if specified.

Each coordinate system defined in MSC.Patran has three principal axes. These axes define how

spatial locations are determined in that coordinate system, and are internally numbered 1, 2 and

3. The meaning of each principal axis depends on if the coordinate frame is rectangular,

cylindrical or spherical.

When a coordinate frame is created, its principal axes and its orientation are displayed at the

appropriate location on the model. The ID of the coordinate frame is also displayed at the

coordinate frame’s origin.

Important: Coordinate frame angles for the cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames (that

is, θ and Φ ) are expressed in degrees. Special conditions apply when defining

spatial functions in cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames. For more

information, see Procedures for Using Fields (p. 133) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

Rectangular Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-1 shows the principal axes of a rectangular

coordinate frame and a point, P, in rectangular space. In a rectangular frame, the principal axes

1, 2 and 3 correspond to the X, Y and Z axes, respectively. Points in space specified in a

rectangular coordinate frame are entered in the order: x-coordinate, y-coordinate and z-

coordinate.

Axis 3 P = (X, Y, Z)

Axis 2

Y

X

Axis 1

Y

X

CHAPTER 3 6

Coordinate Frames

Cylindrical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-2 shows a cylindrical frame in which the principal

axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and Z axes, respectively. Points specified in a

cylindrical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate and z-

coordinate.

Axis 3 P = (R,θ, Z)

Axis 2

T(θ)

R

Axis 1

θ

R

Spherical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-3 shows a spherical frame in which the principal axes

1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and P ( Φ ) axes, respectively. Points specified in a spherical

coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate, and phi-

coordinate.

A node’s local directions (1, 2, 3) can vary according to its position within the spherical

coordinate frame. For example:

If node lies along R direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P

If node lies along R direction, then dir 3 of node is along +T

If node lies along T direction, then dir 1 of node is along +T

If node lies along T direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P

If node lies along T direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R

If node lies along P direction, then dir 1 of node is along +P

If node lies along P direction, then dir 2 of node is along +T

If node lies along P direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

See Input LBCs Set Data (Static Load Case) (p. 22) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:

Functional Assignments.

P (Φ)

Axis 3 P = (R,θ, φ)

R

Axis 2

T(θ)

Axis 1

φ

R

CHAPTER 3 6

Coordinate Frames

There are six ways you can create a local rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame

in MSC.Patran. They are listed as separate methods under the Geometry Application’s Create

action:

• 3Point

• Axis

• Euler

• Normal

• 2Vector

• View Vector

For more information on using the application forms for the Create methods, see Creating

Coordinate Frames (p. 350).

You can also create coordinate frames using the Transform action’s Translate and Rotate

methods. For more information, see Transforming Coordinate Frames (p. 690).

The following sections briefly discuss the Create methods for coordinate frames.

3 Point Method. Figure 3-4 illustrates using the Create action’s 3 Point method for creating a

coordinate frame by specifying three points:

3

A point location, using the other two A point location on axis 3.

points, that defines a plane formed

by axis

1 and 3.

A point location at the origin.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Axis Method. Figure 3-5 illustrates using the Axis method to create a coordinate frame by

specifying a point location at the origin, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3, and a point location on

one of the two remaining axes.

or 3 (you may choose which one).

the two remaining axes (you may

choose

which one).

Euler Method. The Euler Create action creates a new coordinate frame through three rotations

from an existing coordinate frame. Specifically, the following steps are performed in the order

shown:

1. Input the reference coordinate frame ID.

2. Enter the point location of the coordinate frame’s origin.

3. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 1.

4. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 2.

5. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 3.

The final orientation of the new coordinate frame depends on the order of rotations that are

made.

CHAPTER 3 6

Coordinate Frames

Normal Method. Figure 3-6 illustrates using the Normal method to create a coordinate frame,

where its origin is at a point location on a surface. The positive axis 3 direction is normal to the

surface by using right-hand rule and crossing the surface’s ξ 1 parametric direction with the ξ 2

direction. The axis 1 direction is along the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the axis 2 direction is

orthogonal to axis 1 and 3.

For more information on the definition of the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes, see Parameterization

(p. 5).

Y

X Z

ξ2

ξ1

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Coordinate Frames

You can translate or scale geometry in MSC.Patran by using the Transform action’s Translate

method or Scale method. For information and examples on using either form, see Translating

Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors (p. 605) or Scaling Points, Curves,

Surfaces, Solids and Vectors (p. 629).

On either form, you can choose either the Cartesian in Refer. CF toggle or the Curvilinear in

Refer. CF toggle.

If Curvilinear in Refer. CF is chosen, you can specify either an existing cylindrical or spherical

coordinate frame as the reference, and the translation vector or the scale factors will be

interpreted as R, θ , Z for the cylindrical system, and as R, θ , Φ for the spherical system. (Both

the θ axis and Φ axis are measured in degrees.)

Figure 3-7 throughFigure 3-10 are examples of using the Translate and Scale methods with the

Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.

3

1 4

2 1

T R

2

1

Z

Y 5

6

X

Z

Figure 3-7 Translate Method where Surface 1 is Translated <1 90 0> within Cylindrical

Coordinate Frame 1

CHAPTER 3 6

Coordinate Frames

2

3

1

2 1

T R

1

Z

X

Z 4

Figure 3-8 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate

Frame 1

3

4 1

2 1

Y T R

1

Z

X

Z

Figure 3-9 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate

Frame 1

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

2

1

2 1 3

4

Y T R

1

Z

X

Z

Figure 3-10 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <1 2 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate

Frame 1

Points along the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system and at the origin of a spherical

coordinate system cannot be transformed uniquely in the θ (cylindrical) or θ and φ (spherical)

coordinates respectively. This is due to the fact that there is no unique θ for points on the z-axis

of a cylindrical coordinate system or θ and φ coordinates at the origin of a spherical coordinate

system. Therefore, in MSC.Patran, any point on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or

at the origin of a spherical coordinate system is not transformed.

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

Create Actions

4

■ Overview of Geometry Create Action

■ Creating Planes

■ Creating Vectors

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Select any method to obtain detailed help.

Point ❏ XYZ Creates points from their cartesian coordinates or from existing nodes

or vertices.

❏ ArcCenter Creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves.

❏ Extract Creates points on existing curves at a parametric coordinate location.

❏ Interpolate Creates one or more points between two existing point locations that

are uniformly or nonuniformly spaced apart.

❏ Intersect Creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of

entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve,

Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.

❏ Offset Creates a point on an existing curve.

❏ Pierce Creates a point at the location where a curve intersects or pierces a

surface or solid face.

❏ Project Creates points from an existing set of points or vertices that are either

projected normally or projected through a defined vector or projected

through the current view angle, onto an existing surface or solid face.

Curve ❏ Point Creates curves through two, three or four point locations.

❏ Arc3Point Creates arced curves through a starting, middle and ending point

locations.

❏ Chain Creates a chained composite curve from two or more existing curves.

Usually used for creating trimmed surfaces.

❏ Conic Creates a conic curve based on a defined altitude and focal point and a

starting and ending points.

❏ Extract Creates a curve on an existing surface either at a parametric coordinate

location or on an edge of the surface.

❏ Fillet Creates a fillet curve with a defined radius between two existing

curves or edges.

❏ Fit Creates a curve that passes through a set of point locations based on a

least squares fit.

❏ Intersect Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces.

❏ Manifold Creates a curve on a a surface or solid face that is between two or more

point locations.

❏ Normal Creates a curve that is normal from an existing surface or solid face to a

point location.

❏ Offset Creates either constant or variable offset curves from an existing curve.

CHAPTER 4 7

Create Actions

Curve ❏ Project Creates curves from an existing set of curves or edges that is projected

(cont.) onto a surface either normally or from a defined plane or vector or

based on the current view angle.

❏ PWL Creates contiguous straight curves between two or more point

locations.

❏ Spline Creates a spline curve that passes through two or more point locations.

❏ TanCurve Creates a curve that is tangent between two curves or edges.

❏ TanPoint Creates a curve from a point location to a tangent point on a curve.

❏ XYZ Creates a curve at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its

length and orientation.

❏ Involute Creates involute curves either using an Angles option or a Radii

option.

❏ Revolve Creates curves that are rotated from point locations about a rotation

axis for a defined angle.

❏ 2D Normal Creates straight curves that are perpendicular to an existing curve or

edge and that lies within a defined plane.

❏ 2D Circle Creates a circle within a defined plane.

❏ 2D ArcAngles Creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane.

❏ 2D Arc2Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that uses a

starting, ending and center point locations.

❏ 2D Arc3Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that passes

through a starting, middle and ending point locations.

Surface ❏ Curve Creates surfaces that passes through either two, three, four or N curves

or edges.

❏ Composite Create surfaces that are composed from multiple surfaces.

❏ Decompose Creates surfaces from an existing surface (usually a trimmed surface)

based on four cursor defined vertices that lie on the existing surface.

❏ Edge Creates surfaces from three or four curves or edges.

❏ Extract Creates a surface within a solid based on either the parametric

coordinate location or on the face of the solid.

❏ Fillet Creates a filleted surface with one or two defined radii between two

existing surfaces or faces.

❏ Match Creates a surface that is topologically congruent with one of the two

specified surfaces.

❏ Offset Creates constant offset surfaces from an existing surface.

❏ Ruled Creates a surface that is created between two existing curves or edges.

❏ Trimmed Creates a trimmed surface that consist of an outer chained curve loop

and optionally, an inner chained curve loop.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Surface ❏ Vertex Creates a surface from four point locations.

(cont.)

❏ XYZ Creates a surface at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its

length and orientation.

❏ Extrude Creates a surface from an existing curve or edge that is extruded

through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.

❏ Glide Creates a surface that is created from a specified director curve or

edge, along one or more base curves or edges.

❏ Normal Creates surfaces from existing curves through a defined thickness.

❏ Revolve Creates surfaces that are rotated from curves or edges about a rotation

axis for a defined angle.

❏ Mesh Creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh (shell mesh).

Solid ❏ Primitive Creates a solid (block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus) with user input a

point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also

provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target

solid using the created block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus as the tool

solid.

❏ Surface Creates solids that pass through two, three, four or N surfaces or faces.

❏ B-rep Creates a B-rep solid from an existing set of surfaces that form a closed

volume.

❏ Decompose Creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex

locations on each face.

❏ Face Creates solids from five or six surfaces or faces.

❏ Vertex Creates solids from eight point locations.

❏ XYZ Creates a solid at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its

length and orientation.

❏ Extrude Creates a solid from an existing surface or face that is extruded

through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.

❏ Glide Creates a solid that is created from a specified director curve or edge,

along one or more base surfaces or faces.

❏ Normal Creates solids from existing surfaces through a defined thickness.

❏ Revolve Creates solids that are rotated from surfaces or faces about a rotation

axis for a defined angle.

CHAPTER 4 7

Create Actions

Coord ❏ 3Point Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based

on defined point locations for its origin, a point on Axis 3 and a point

on Plane 1-3.

❏ Axis Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based

on point locations that define the original and either points one Axis 1

and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1

❏ Euler Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based

on three rotation angles about Axes 1, 2 and 3.

❏ Normal Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame whose

Axis 3 is normal to a specified surface or solid face, and whose origin is

at a point location.

Plane ❏ Vector Normal Creates a plane from a specified point as the plane origin and a

specified direction as the plane normal.

❏ Curve Normal Creates a plane from a point on or projected onto a specified curve as

the plane origin and the curve tangent at that point as the plane

normal.

❏ Interpolate Creates a plane from the interpolating points on a specified curve as

the plane origins and the curve tangents at those points as the plane

normals.

❏ Least Squares Creates a plane from the least square based on three and more

specified non-colinear points.

❏ Offset Creates a plane that is parallel to a specified plane with a specified

offset distance.

❏ Surface Creates a plane from a specified point on or projected to a specified

Tangent surface as the plane origin and the surface normal at that location as

the plane normal.

❏ 3 Points Creates a plane from three specified non-colinear points. The plane

origin is located at the first point.

❏ Point-Vector Creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.

Vector ❏ Magnitude Creates a vector by specifying the vector base point, the vector

direction and the vector magnitude of the desired vector.

❏ Intersect Creates a vector along the intersecting line of two specified planes. The

vector base point is the projection of the first plane origin on that

intersecting line.

❏ Normal Creates a vector that has the direction parallel to a specified plane and

the base point at a specified point on or projected onto that plane.

❏ Product Creates a vector that is the cross product of two specified vectors and

has its base point located at the base point of the first vector.

❏ 2 Point Creates a vector that starts from a specified base point and pointing to

a specified tip point.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method)

The XYZ method creates points from their cartesian coordinates or at an existing node, vertex or

other point location as provided in the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: XYZ

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to

Point ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

5

Functions.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Used to express the coordinate values entered in the

Point Coordinate List, within the reference frame. Default

Coord 0 is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Point Coordinates List means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

[0 0 0]

location for the new points, either by entering the

-Apply- coordinates from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the

point location. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node

20, Solid 10.4.3.1.

The Point Select menu that appears can be used to

define how you want to cursor select the appropriate

points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

CHAPTER 4 7

Create Actions

Creates Point 6 using the Create/XYZ method that is located at the global rectangular

coordinates X = 10, Y = 5 and Z = 3.125.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 3

Object: Point

Method: XYZ 2

Point ID List

6 1

Coord 0

Auto Execute 4

Y

Point Coordinates List

[10 5 3.125] Z X

5

-Apply- After:

3

Y 4

6

Z X

5

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Point 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icons listed below which locates Point

5 on Surface 1, whose exact location is cursor defined.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point 2 3

Method: XYZ

Point ID List

5

1

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Auto Execute 1 Y 4

Point Coordinates List Z X

Construct Point Surface Point

-Apply-

After:

2 3

1

5

1 Y 4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 7

Create Actions

Creates Points 1 through 4 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which

locates the points at Nodes 10 through 13.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

10 11

Object: Point

Method: XYZ

Point ID List

1

12 13

Coord 0

Auto Execute Y

Point Coordinates List

Z X

Node 10:13

-Apply-

After:

1 2

3 4

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Points 1 through 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which

locates Points 1 through 5 by cursor defining them on the screen.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: XYZ

Point ID List

1

Coord 0

Auto Execute Y

Z X

[1.596433 0.096824 0.000000]

-Apply-

After:

1

2

5

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 7

Create Actions

The ArcCenter method creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves which

have a non-zero center/radius of curvature.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Arc Center

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Point ID List

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

48

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Curve List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

-Apply- them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:

Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that

appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select

the appropriate curves or edges.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates point 3 using Create/Point/Arc Center which locates point 3 in the center of the arc.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point 1

Method: Arc Center

Point ID List

2

3

Auto Execute

Curve List

Curve 1 Y

Z X

-Apply- 1

After:

Y 3

Z X

1

CHAPTER 4 8

Create Actions

Extracting Points

Extracting Points from Curves and Edges

Creates points on an existing set of curves or edges at the parametric ξ 1 coordinate location of

the curve or edge, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .

Geometry

Select the curve icon to extract a point from a curve.

Action: Create

Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Extract Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the

Point ID List curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will

5 create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of

the curve.

◆ Equal Arc Length ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar

or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is

◆

◆ Equal Parametric Values defined by the connectivity of the curve or edge. You can plot

the ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle

on the Geometric Properties form under the menus

Parametric Position

Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

0.0 1.0

0.5 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

u Parametric Value need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve List • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the

-Apply-

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:

Basic Functions

by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the

keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve

Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to

cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Point 7 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to

0.75, on Curve 1. Notice that the curve’s parametric direction arrow is displayed.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Extract 6

1

1

Point ID List

7

5

Parameterization Method

Y

◆ Equal Arc Length

◆

◆ Equal Parametric Values Z X

Parametric Position

0.0 1.0

0.75

After:

u Parametric Value

Auto Execute

Curve List

6

Curve 1

1

-Apply- 1

5

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 8

Create Actions

Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to

0.75, on the edge of Surface 1.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

2 3

Method: Extract

Point ID List

5

Parameterization Method Y

1 4

◆ Equal Arc Length

◆ Z X

◆ Equal Parametric Values

Parametric Position

0.0 1.0

0.75 After:

u Parametric Value

2 5 3

Auto Execute

Curve List

Surface 1.4

1

-Apply-

1 Y 4

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates single points on an existing set of surfaces or faces at a specified u,v parametric location

on the surface.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Extract

Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Parametric Position

0.0 1.0 Specify the surface or faces’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate

value , which have a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the

0.5 slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and

u Parametric Value ξ 2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface

or face. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 directions by choosing the

0.0 1.0 Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties

0.5 form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

v Parametric Value

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Surface List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

either by cursor selecting the surfaces or faces or by

-Apply- entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1

or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be

used to define how you want to cursor select the

appropriate surfaces or faces.

CHAPTER 4 8

Create Actions

Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract Point from Surface or Face method, where the point is

located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.333 and ξ 2 ( v ) is equal to 0.666, on Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 2 3

Object: Point

Method: Extract

Point ID List

1

Parametric Position

0.0 1.0

Y

0.333 1 4

u Parametric Value Z X

0.0 1.0

0.666 After:

v Parametric Value 2 3

Auto Execute

Surface List

Surface 1 5

1

-Apply-

Y

1 4

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of

points is defined by a diagonal of two points.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Extract

Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Number of Points

u Direction Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction

of the surface.

2

v Direction

2

Bounds

Specify the Bounds as Diagonal Points when two point

Diagonal Points locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points

to be extracted from the surface.

Parametric

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Point 1 List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the two points to define the diagonal for the points,

either by cursor selecting the points or by entering the IDs from

Point 2 List the keyboard. Example: Point 1 or Curve 1.1, Surface 1.1.1.

The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how

you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

Surface List

Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either

by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from

the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface

Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want

-Apply- to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.

CHAPTER 4 8

Create Actions

Creates Points 7 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by points 5 and 6.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 2 3

Object: Point

Method: Extract

5

Point ID List

7

Number of Points Y

1 4

u Direction Z X

4

v Direction After:

6 2 3

Bounds

Diagonal Points

Parametric 26 27 28 6

22 23 24 25

Auto Execute 18 19 20 21

1

14 15 16 17

Point 1 List 10 11 12 13

Point 5 5 7 8 9

Point 2 List

Point 6

Y

Surface List 1 4

Z X

Surface 1

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of

points is defined by a parametric ξ , ξ 2 diagonal.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Extract

Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Number of Points

u Direction Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction

of the surface.

2

v Direction

2

Bounds locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points

to be extracted from the surface.

Diagonal Points

Parametric

Display the Parametric Bounds form to define the u,v

parametric locations to define the bounds of the points.

[Parametric Bounds...]

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Surface List

Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either

by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from

the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface

Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want

-Apply- to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.

CHAPTER 4 8

Create Actions

Creates Points 5 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by u-min=0.333, u-max=0.666, v-

min=0.333, and v-max=0.666.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 2 3

Object: Point

Method: Extract

Point ID List

5

Y

Number of Points 1 4

u Direction Z X

4

After:

v Direction

2 3

6

Bounds

Diagonal Points

25 26 27 28

Parametric

21 22 23 24

17 18 19 20

1

[Parametric Bounds...] 13 14 15 16

9 10 11 12

Auto Execute 5 6 7 8

Surface List

Surface 1

Y

1 4

Z X

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Parametric Bounds Specify the surface’s x1 (u) and x2 (v) coordinate values for the

u v Bounds definition of the bounds of the points, either by using the slide

bar or by entering the value in the databox. The x1and x2

0.0 1.0 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face.

0.0 (x1 has a range of 0 £ x1 £ 1 and x2 has a range of 0 £ x2 £ 1)

u-Min You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by choosing the

Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form

0.0 1.0 under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

1.0

u-Max

0.0 1.0

0.0

v-Min

0.0 1.0

1.0

v-Max

Reset

OK Cancel

CHAPTER 4 9

Create Actions

Interpolating Points

Between Two Points

The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform

spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to

be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location

provided by the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Interpolate

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to

Point ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

5 Functions.

Option: Point

Enter the number of interior points you want to create

Number of Interior Points between the specified point locations in the Point 1 and

Point 2 Coordinates List.

1

Point Spacing Method Select either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point

◆ Uniform spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON,

then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1

◆

◆ Nonuniform ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

Auto Execute point location to begin the interpolation. Specify in the

Point 2 Coordinates listbox, the ending point location to

Point 1 Coordinates List end the interpolation.

You can express the point location either by entering the

location’s cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by

Point 2 Coordinates List using the Point Select menu to cursor select the

appropriate points, vertices, nodes or other point

locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20,

Solid 10.4.3.1.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates five interior points starting with Point 3 that are between Points 1 and 2, using the

Create/Interpolate/Point option. The spacing is nonuniform at L2/L1 = 2.0.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Interpolate

Point ID List

3

1 2

Option: Point

Number of Interior Points

5

◆ Uniform

Z X

◆

◆ Nonuniform

L1 L2

After:

L2/L1 = 2.0

Auto Execute

Point 1 Coordinates List

Point 1

1 3 4 5 6 7 2

Point 2 Coordinates List

Point 2

-Apply-

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 9

Create Actions

Same as the previous example, except the five new points are uniformly spaced between Nodes

1 and 2, by using the Point select menu icon listed below.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point 2

Method: Interpolate

Point ID List

1

1

Option: Point

Number of Interior Points

5

◆ Uniform Y

◆

◆ Nonuniform

Z X

After:

Auto Execute 5

4

Point 1 Coordinates List 3

Node 1 2

1

Point 2 Coordinates List 1

Node 2

-Apply-

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Interpolate method using the Curve option creates n points along an existing curve or edge

of uniform or nonuniform spacing where n is the number of interior points to be created.

Enter the number of interior points you want to create along the

curves or edges that are specified in the Curve listbox.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to

be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

Method: Interpolate MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Functions.

Point ID List

5 If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the

point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the

Option: Curve curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran

will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric

Number of Interior Points values of the curve.

Parameterization Method spacing for the new interior points.

◆ Equal Arc Length If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1,

where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0. The

◆

◆ Equal Parametric Values starting point of where L1 and L2 is measured from is at

the curve’s or edge’s parametric origin, which is defined

Point Spacing Method by its connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction by

choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the

◆ Uniform Geometric Properties form under the menus

◆

◆ Nonuniform Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

Specify the existing curves or edges to create points on,

either by cursor selecting the curves or edges or by

Auto Execute entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1

Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that

Curve List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor

select the appropriate curves or edges.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic

Functions

CHAPTER 4 9

Create Actions

Creates five uniformly spaced interior points, starting with Point 6 on Curve 1, using the

Create/Point/Interpolate/Curve option.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Interpolate

Point ID List 5

6

1

Option: Curve

1

Number of Interior Points

5

Y

Parameterization Method

◆ Equal Arc Length Z X

◆

◆ Equal Parametric Values

◆ Uniform

◆

◆ Nonuniform After:

6 7 5

Auto Execute

1 8

Curve List 1

10

Curve 1 9

Y

-Apply-

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Points 5 through 9 that are nonuniformly spaced by using the Create/Interpolate/Curve

option, where the points are created on an edge of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Interpolate 2 3

Point ID List

5

Option: Curve

1

Number of Interior Points

5

Parameterization Method 2

◆ Equal Arc Length 1 Y 1 4

◆

◆ Equal Parametric Values

Z X

◆ Uniform

◆

◆ Nonuniform After:

L1 L2

2 5 6 7 8 9 3

L2/L1 = 2.0

Auto Execute

Curve List 1

Curve 1

-Apply- 2

1 Y 1 4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 9

Create Actions

The Intersect method creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities:

Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.

One point will be created at each intersection location. The pair of entities should intersect within

a value defined by the Global Model Tolerance. If the entities do not intersect, MSC.Patran will

create a point at the closest approach on each specified curve, edge, or vector for the

Curve/Curve and Vector/Curve intersection options.

Geometry Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Action: Create Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Object: Point

Options for 1st entity to intersect:

Method: Intersect 1. Curve (or edge of a surface)

2. Vector

Point ID List

24

Options for 2nd entity to intersect:

Option: <Type> 1. Curve (or edge of a surface)

2. Surface

Option: <Type> 3. Plane

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

<Type> List means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

<Type> List

The <Type> list changes depending on the option selected.

Specify in List 1 and List 2 the pair of intersecting entities at

which to create points, either by cursor selecting them or by

entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1

-Apply- Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1.

The Select menus that appear can be used to define how

you want to cursor select the appropriate entities.

The Global Model Tolerance that defines the tolerance

value within which the two entities can intersect is defined

on the Global Preferences form under the

Preferences/Global menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Global Preferences (p. 290) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:

Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Point 17, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curve 3 and an edge

of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point 12

Method: Intersect

16

3

Point ID List 15

17 13

Option: Curve

1

Option: Curve

11

Auto Execute

Curve List Y

Curve 3 X

Z

14

Curve List

Surface 1.2

After:

-Apply- 12

16

3 17

15

13

11

Z X

14

CHAPTER 4 9

Create Actions

Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curves 1 and 2.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Intersect

Point ID List

1

1

Option: Curve

Option: Curve

Auto Execute

Curve List Y 2

Curve 1 Z X

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply-

Y 2

2

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Because the curves do not intersect,

Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach of the two curves.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Intersect

Point ID List

1

1 2

Option: Curve

Option: Curve

Auto Execute

Curve List

Y

Curve 1

Z X

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply-

1 2

1 2

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Points 1, 2 and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 6 with

Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

6

Method: Intersect 11

Point ID List

1

Option: Curve

Option: Surface

Auto Execute

Z

Curve List Y

Curve 6 X

Surface List

Surface 1

After:

-Apply-

6

1 1

2 1

Z

Y

X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 2 with

Plane 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Intersect

Point ID List

1 2

Option: Curve

1

Option: Plane

Auto Execute

Curve List Y

Curve 2 Z X

Plane List

Plane 1

After:

-Apply- 1

2 2

3

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 with

Curve 2.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Intersect

Point ID List

1

2

Option: Vector

Option: Curve 1

Auto Execute

Vector List Y

Vector 1 Z X

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply-

1

2 2

3

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Point 1 on Vector 1 and Point 2 on Curve 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Since the

entities do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach between the Vector

and the Curve.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Intersect

Point ID List

1 2

Option: Vector

Option: Curve

Auto Execute 1

Vector List Y

Vector 1 Z X

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply-

2

1 2

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Points 1 and 2 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 and

Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Intersect

Point ID List

1

1

Option: Vector

Option: Surface

1

Auto Execute

Vector List Y

Vector 1 Z X

Surface List

Surface 1

After:

-Apply-

1 1

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Point 1 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 2 and Plane 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Intersect

Point ID List 2

1

1

Option: Vector

Option: Plane

Y

Auto Execute X

Z

Vector List

Vector 2

Plane List

Plane 1

After:

-Apply-

1 1

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Offset method creates a point on an existing curve by offsetting a specified model space

distance from an existing point on the same curve.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Offset

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Point ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Offset Distance Input the Model Space offset distance from an existing point

on a curve (curve to be input).

Auto Execute Specify the existing points on the curve either by cursor

selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.

Reference Point List

Example: Point 1 Curve 5.1. The Point Select menu that

appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select

the appropriate points or vertices.

Curve/Point List

Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curve or edge, along

with a point on the curve which indicates the direction in

which the offset will be taken. For each listbox, the Curve

-Apply- Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the

bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or

edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate

endpoint locations.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Global Preferences (p. 290) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:

Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates point 3 on curve one, .75 units from point 1 using Create/Point/Offset.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Offset 1

Point ID List

3

Offset Distance

0.75

1 2

Auto Execute

Reference Point List Y

Point 1

Z X

Curve/Point List

Geometry (Curve 1)

After:

-Apply-

1 2

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Pierce method creates points at the intersection between an existing curve or edge and a

surface or solid face. The curve or edge must completely intersect with the surface or solid face.

If the curve or edge intersects the surface or face more than one time, MSC.Patran will create a

point at each intersection.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Pierce Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Point ID List

1 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve List

Surface List intersect the surfaces and faces listed in the Surface listbox.

Specify in Surface List the existing surfaces or faces that

intersect with the curves and edges.

You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the

IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1

-Apply- Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.

The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears

can be used to define how you want to cursor select the

appropriate curves, edges, surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:

Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Point 15, using the Create/Pierce method at the location where Curve 3 intersects

Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point 14

Method: Pierce

Point ID List

1

15

11

Auto Execute 3 5

Curve List 1 12

Curve 3

Y

Surface List

Surface 1 Z X

13

-Apply-

After:

14

11

3 5

15

1 12

Z X

13

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve is defined by Points 13 and

14 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

14

Method: Pierce

Point ID List

1

15

11

Auto Execute 5

Curve List 1 12

Construct 2 Point Curve

Y

Surface List

Surface 1 Z X

13

-Apply-

After:

14

11

5

15

1 12

Z X

13

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Project method creates points by projecting an existing set of points onto a surface or solid

face through a defined Projection Vector. New points can be projected from other points,

vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See

Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:

Basic Functions.

Geometry

Action: Create Normal to Surf option will project the existing points by using

Object: Point the normal direction of the specified surface or face.

Define Vector option allows you to specify the coordinates of

Method: Project the Projection Vector and the Refer. Coordinate Frame to

express the vector within. (Example: <1 1 0>). The Vector

Point ID List Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor

5 define the vector direction.

View Vector option will project the existing points by using the

Project onto: Surface view angle of the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the

existing points using the normal direction of the screen.

Option:Normal to Surf

Projection Vector

<0 0 0>

Refer. Coordinate Frame Projection Vector and Refer. Coordinate Frame is used if the

Define Vector option is chosen.

Coord 0

Delete Original Points If ON, after Project completes the existing points specified in

Point List will be deleted from the database.

Auto Execute

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Projection Vector

<0 0 0>

Coord 0

Delete Original Points other point locations that you want to project onto the surfaces

or faces specified in the Surface List box.

Auto Execute Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the

points will be projected onto.

Point List

You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the

IDs from the keyboard. Example: For points - Point 1:10,

Curve 5.1 Surface 5.1.1; For surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.

Surface List The Point Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears

can be used to define how you want to cursor select the

appropriate points, vertices, nodes, surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Viewing Menu (p. 219) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. Points 13:16,

18:20 and Node 1 are all projected normally onto Surface 1. Notice Delete Original Points is

pressed in.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

10

Object: Point

Method: Project

11

15

Point ID List 16

21 14

13

Option: Normal to Surf

18

Projection Vector Y 209

19

<0 0 0> ZX

12

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

After:

Delete Original Points

Auto Execute 10

Point List

11

Point 13:16 18:20 Node 1 23

24

Surface List 22

Surface 10

1

21

-Apply-

26

Y 28 9

27

ZX

12

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Point/Project/Define Vector option. The points

are projected onto Surface 1 through the vector <-1 0 1> that is expressed within the Refer.

Coordinate Frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

Method: Project 10 11

15

Point ID List 16 14

13 Y

17 1

Z X 13

18 20

Y 19

Projection Vector

9 12

<-1 0 1> Z X

Coord 1

After:

Delete Original Points

Auto Execute

Point List 10 11

23

Point 13:20

24 22

Surface List

Y

Surface 1

25 21 1 1

Z X

-Apply-

26 28

Y 27

9 12

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/View Vector option. The points are

projected onto Surface 1 using the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete

Original Points is pressed in and Points 13 through 20 are deleted.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Point

10 11

Method: Project

15

Point ID List 16 14

21 Y

1

17 1

Z X 13

Project onto: Surface

Y 19

Projection Vector 9 12

Z X

<0 0 0>

Coord 0

After:

Delete Original Points

Auto Execute

10 11

Point List

23

Point 13:20

24 22

Surface List Y

Surface 1 1

25 1

Z X 21

-Apply- 26 28

Y 27

9 12

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creating Curves Through 2 Points

The Point method using the 2 Point option creates straight parametric cubic curves between two

existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point

locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Option: 2 Point Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Starting Point List

Specify the starting and ending point locations for the new

curves. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs

from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20,

Ending Point List

Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used

to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,

vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Point/2 Point option, which is between Point 1 and Node 10.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Point

10

Curve ID List

3

Option: 2 Point

Auto Execute

Starting Point List

1

Point 1 Y

Node 10

-Apply-

After:

2

10

1

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Point method using the 3 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through

three existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the

ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices,

nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: 3 Point

Parameterization Method

◆ Parametric Position Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u )

parametric position of the middle point for the new curve, either

◆

◆ Chord Length by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox

where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order

0.0 1.0 of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and

0.5

Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity.

u Value of Middle Point You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting the

Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form

under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,

MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the

points along the curve, based on the chord length distances

relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means

the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized,

depending on where the interior points are located.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Parameterization Method

◆ Parametric Position

◆

◆ Chord Length

0.0 1.0

0.5

u Value of Middle Point By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Starting Point List

Middle Point List Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the

new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point

locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,

Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that

Ending Point List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select

the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric

Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/3 Point option, which is created through Points 1 and

2 and Node 10. Point 2 is located on the curve at x1(u) =0.5.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

10

Object: Curve

Method: Point

Curve ID List

1

Option: 3 Point

Parameterization Method 2

◆ Parametric Position

◆

◆ Chord Length 1

Y

0.0 1.0

0.5

Z X

u Value of Middle Point

Auto Execute

Starting Point List After:

Point 1

Point 2

Ending Point List

Node 10

-Apply-

1

2

1

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 2 is located on the curve at ξ 1 ( u )

=0.75, instead of 0.5.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

10

Object: Curve

Method: Point

Curve ID List

1

Option: 3 Point

2

Parameterization Method

◆ Parametric Position

1

◆

◆ Chord Length Y

0.0 1.0

0.75 Z X

Auto Execute

After:

Starting Point List

Point 1 10

Middle Point List

Point 2

Ending Point List

Node 10

-Apply- 2

1

Y

1

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Point method using the 4 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through

four existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the ending

point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or

other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: 4 Point

Parameterization Method

◆ Parametric Position Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u ) parametric

◆ position of the second and third points on the new curve, where

◆ Chord Length

0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Press the Parametric Positions button to enter the ξ 1

locations for both points. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order

[Parametric Positions...] of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending

Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot

Auto Execute the curve’s ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle

on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display

Starting Point List Properties/Geometric.

Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,

MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points

Second Point List along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the

locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or

may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior

points are located.

Third Point List

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Option: 4 Point

Parameterization Method

◆ Parametric Position

◆

◆ Chord Length

[Parametric Positions...]

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Starting Point List

Second Point List Specify the starting, second, third and ending point locations for

the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point

locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,

Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that

Third Point List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the

appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic

Functions

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/4 Point option, which is created through Points 1, 2 and

3 and Node 10. Point 2 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.333 and Point 3 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.667.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 10

Method: Point

Curve ID List

3

1

Option: 4 Point

Parameterization Method 2

◆ Parametric Position

◆

◆ Chord Length 1

Y

[Parametric Positions...]

Z X

Auto Execute

Starting Point List

Point 1 After:

Second Point List

10

Point 2

Point 3

3

Ending Point List

Node 10 1

2

-Apply-

1

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Point 2 is located at x1(u) =0.25

and Point 3 is located at x1(u) =0.80.

Geometry Before

Action: Create

Object: Curve 10

Method: Point

Curve ID List

3 3

Option: 4 Point

Parameterization Method 2

◆ Parametric Position

◆

◆ Chord Length Y

1

[Parametric Positions...]

Z X

Auto Execute

Starting Point List

Point 1 After:

Second Point List

10

Point 2

Point 3

3

Ending Point List

Node 10

1

2

-Apply-

1

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

This subordinate form is displayed when the Parametric Positions button is pressed on the

Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Point form for the 4 Point option.

Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions the second and third point locations that are

0.0 1.0 specified in the Second Point List and Third

0.333 Point Listboxes, where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . This

defines where these two points will occupy

u Parametric Value of second point on the new curve. Either use the slide bars

or enter the ξ 1 value in each databox.

Moving the slidebar will automatically

0.0 1.0 0.667 update the databox value.

Press OK to update the ξ 1 values.

Press Cancel if you want to exit the form

u Parametric Value of third point and not change the specified ξ 1 values.

The direction of ξ1 is defined by the order of

OK Cancel the point locations specified in the Starting

Point List and Ending Point List, which

defines the new curve’s connectivity. You

can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves

by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle

on the Geometric Properties form under the

☞ More Help: menus Display/Display

Properties/Geometric.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:

Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Arc3Point method creates true arced curves that pass through three specified point

locations. MSC.Patran calculates the arc’s center point location and the radius and angle of the

arc. The three point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations that are

provided on the Point select menu.

the center location of the arc.

Geometry

Action: Create

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Object: Curve created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Arc3Point

Curve ID List

1

If PATRAN 2 Convention is pressed, enter the number of curves

Curves per Arc to be created for each arc definition. Otherwise, the Curves pre

1 Arc databox is disabled.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Starting Point List

Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the

new arc to pass through. Either cursor select the point

Ending Point List locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point

1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu

that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor

select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point

locations.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Arc3Point method, which creates a true arc through Points 1

through 3. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed which created Point 4.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

2

Method: Arc3Point

Curve ID List

3

1

3 1

Auto Execute Z X

Starting Point List

Point 1

Point 2 After:

Ending Point List

Point 3

2

-Apply-

Y

3 4 1

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the point locations for the arc are

specified with point coordinate locations.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Arc3Point

Curve ID List

3

1

Y

Auto Execute

Z X

Starting Point List

[-1 0 0]

[0 1 0] After:

Ending Point List

[1 0 0]

2

-Apply-

Y

3 4 1

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Chain method creates a chained composite curve from one or more existing curves or edges.

The existing curves and edges must be connected end to end. If a chained curve is used to create

planer or general trimmed surfaces for an inner loop, they must form a closed loop. Chained

curves are used to create planar or general trimmed surfaces using the

Create/Surface/Trimmed form.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Method: Chain created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

If selected, the Auto Chaining form is displayed to enable

Auto Chain... auto chaining of existing curves.

If ON, after Chain completes, the existing curves specified in

the Curve List will be deleted from the database.

Curve List

selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.

-Apply- Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select

menu that appears can be used to define how you want to

cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)

• Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)

• Disassembling a Chained Curve (p. 429)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 11, using the Create/Chain method, which is created from Curves 3 through 10.

Notice that Delete Constituent Curves is pressed and Curves 3 through 10 are deleted.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

8 9 7 4 5 3

Object: Curve

Method: Chain 8 6

Curve ID List 5

6 7

11 10 4

Auto Chain...

Delete Constituent Curves

Curve List 1 3 2

Curve 3:10

Y

-Apply- Z X

After:

8 7 4 11 3

6 5

1 2

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Conic method creates parametric cubic curves representing a conic section (that is,

hyperbola, parabola, ellipse, or circular arc), by specifying point locations for the starting and

ending points of the conic and the conic’s focal point. The point locations can be points, vertices,

nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Method: Conic created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

Used by the Focal Point List and the Starting and Ending Point

Refer. Coordinate Frame Lists to express the point’s coordinate values that may be entered

Coord 0 within the specified coordinate frame. Example: Coord 5. Default

is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

0.0 1.0

0.5 Enter a value for the altitude of the conic either by using the slide

bar or by entering the value in the databox.

Conic Altitude for Parabola

Focal Point

Altitude

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

0.0 1.0

0.5

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Focal Point List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the focal point location, and the starting and ending point

locations that defines a conic section. Either cursor select the

Ending Point List point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example:

Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select

menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor

select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Conic method whose focal point is Point 3, the starting and

ending points are Points 1 and 2, and the conic altitude is 0.50.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 3

Object: Curve

Method: Conic

Curve ID List

1

Coord 0

0.0 1.0

0.5 Z X

Auto Execute

After:

Focal Point List

Point 3 3

Point 1

Point 2

1

-Apply-

Z X

1 2

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This is the same as the previous example, except that the conic altitude is increased to 0.75 from

0.50 for Curve 2.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

3

Object: Curve

Method: Conic

Curve ID List

2

Coord 0

0.0 1.0 Y

0.75

Z X

Conic Altitude for Parabola 1 2

Auto Execute

Focal Point List After:

Point 3

3

Starting Point List

Point 1

Point 2

1

-Apply-

Z X

1 2

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option

The Extract method creates curves on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by specifying the

surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1

and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 .

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Extract

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: Parametric

Curve Direction

◆ u Direction

Choose either Constant u Direction or Constant v

◆

◆ v Direction Direction. The curves will either be created along either

the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction or along the

Curve Position ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction.

0.0 1.0

0.5

the location of the curve, either by using the slide bar or by

entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions

are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can

plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric

Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the

menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Curve Direction

◆ u Direction

◆

◆ v Direction

Curve Position

0.0 1.0

0.5

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Auto Execute the form.

Surface List

created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the

-Apply- IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The

Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how

you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The curve is created on Surface 2

at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

7 1

Object: Curve 2

Method: Extract

Curve ID List

1

8

Option: Parametric 2

10

Curve Direction

◆

◆ u Direction

◆ v Direction Y

Curve Position X

Z 9

0.0 1.0

0.75

v Parametric Value

After:

Auto Execute

7 1

Surface List 2

Surface 2

11

-Apply- 1

8

2

10

1

Y

12

X 9

Z

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve X is created at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.75,

instead of ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

7 1

Object: Curve 2

Method: Extract

Curve ID List

1

8

Option: Parametric 2

10

Curve Direction

◆ u Direction

◆ v Direction

◆ Y

Curve Position Z

X 9

0.0 1.0

0.75

Auto Execute

7 1

Surface List 2

Surface 2

-Apply-

8

2 11

1 10

Y

12

X 9

Z

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 3 which is at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 on a surface defined by Curve 2 and an edge of Surface

1 by using the Surface select menu icons listed below.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

3

Object: Curve

Method: Extract

Curve ID List

1 2

3

Option: Parametric

5

Curve Direction 6

1

◆ u Direction

◆

2

◆ v Direction

Y

Curve Position Z X

0.0 1.0 7

0.25

v Parametric Value

After:

Auto Execute 3

Surface List

Construct2CurveSurface(Ev

8

1 2

-Apply-

3

5

6

1 9

2

Y

Z X

7

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Extract method creates curves on specified edges of existing surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Extract Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: Edge

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Edge List the form.

faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting

-Apply- them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:

Surface 1.1 Solid 5.1.1.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Extract/Edge option. The curve is created on one of the edges

of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 5

Method: Extract

Curve ID List

3

6

1

2 1

Option: Edge 2

1

Auto Execute

Edge List

Surface 1.2 Y

3

X 4

-Apply- Z

After:

1

5

6

1

2 1

2

1

Y

3

X 4

Z

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The fillet method is intended for use with 2D construction. The created curve is a circular arc.

For this reason, the method will not work if the provided curves are not co-planar. The Patran

2.5 switch overrides this requirement and places no restriction on coplanarity. The result is a

single cubic line so that it is more like a slope continuous blend between the 2 curves.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Fillet created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

Curves per Fillet specifies the number of curves you want to

Fillet Parameters create for each defined fillet arc. This is only used in conjunction

with the Patran 2 Convention.

Curves per Fillet

Fillet Radius specifies a real value for the radius of the fillet arc.

1 Only one radius value is allowed which is applied to all specified

curves or edges/points that are entered in the Curve/Point 1 and

Fillet Radius

2 Lists.

Fillet Tolerance specifies the accuracy MSC.Patran uses when

Fillet Tolerance it subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position.

Decreasing the value helps when the fillet is very small

0.005 compared to the geometry. This is only used in conjunction with

the Patran 2 Convention.

Trim Original Curves

Auto Execute If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original curves specified in the

Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the

Curve/Point 1 List tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original curve.

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-

Calculated Curve 1 Endpoint

Center

Radius

New Fillet

Curve Portions to Trim

Curve 2

Endpoint

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Fillet Parameters

Curves per Fillet

1

Fillet Radius

Fillet Tolerance

0.005

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to Press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve/Point 1 List

Curve/Point 2 List Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the existing

pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the fillet will

be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and

the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to

cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points,

-Apply- vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and

Point 4 and Curve 2 and Point 5, with a radius of 0.5. Notice Trim Original Curves is pressed.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create 1

Object: Curve

Method: Fillet 6

Curve ID List

3

1 2

Fillet Parameters

Curves per Fillet

5

1

Fillet Radius

0.5 Y 4

Fillet Tolerance

Z X

0.005

After:

Auto Execute

1

Curve/Point 1 List

ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve

6

Curve/Point 2 List

ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve

-Apply- 8 3

2

7

5

1

Y 4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and

Point 2 and Curve 2 and Point 3, with a radius of 0.25.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 3

Method: Fillet

2

1

Curve ID List

3 4

Fillet Parameters

Curves per Fillet

1

Fillet Radius

2 Y

0.25

X Z

Fillet Tolerance 1

0.005

Auto Execute After:

Curve/Point 1 List

ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 3 6

Curve/Point 2 List

3 2

ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 1

5 4

-Apply-

2 Y

X Z

1

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Fit method creates a parametric cubic curve by fitting it through a set of two or more point

locations. MSC.Patran uses a parametric least squares numerical approximation for the fit. The

point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point

select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Object:

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Fit Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1 Number of Curves to Create specifies the number of curves to

create to represent the fit through the specified points.

Fit Parameters Convergence Tolerance is used when the Number of Iterations

Number of Curves to Create is greater than zero. This value, measured in model units,

defines the maximum the interior points will deviate from a

1 calculated spline of the original curves that are used in the

synthesis of the new curves. Default is .005.

Convergence Tolerance

Number of Iterations is zero by default. If zero, MSC.Patran will

0.005 create smooth, evenly parameterized curves. If it is greater than

zero, as the value increases, the curve fit will be more accurate,

Number of Iterations

but they will become more nonuniformly parameterized and they

0 may have unwanted kinks or oscillations.

Point List Specify the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point

locations to fit the curve through, either by entering the IDs from

the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations.

Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select

menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the

-Apply- appropriate point locations.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates three curves starting with Curve 1, using the Create/Fit method. The curve is created

through Points 1 through 6.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Fit 6

2

Curve ID List

1 3

5

Fit Parameters

1

Number of Curves to Create 4

3

Y

Convergence Tolerance

0.005 Z X

Number of Iterations

0

Point 1: 6

-Apply-

6

2

7

3 3

5

1 2

8

4

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces

The Intersect method using the 2 Surface option creates curves at the intersection of two surfaces

or solid faces. The two surfaces or faces must completely intersect each other.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Intersect

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: 2 Surface

If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will

appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form

Option:

Intersect Parameters... (p. 157) for more information.

Auto Execute

Surface 1 List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

Surface 2 List

faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by

-Apply- cursor selecting them. Examples: Surface 10 Solid 10.1.

The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you

want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect method with the 2 Surface option. The curve is

located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 2.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 4 6

2

Method: Intersect

Curve ID List

1 2

1

Option: 2 Surface

Intersect Parameters...

3

Auto Execute Y

Surface 1 List

5

Surface 1 Z X

1

Surface 2 List

Surface 2 After:

-Apply- 4 6

2

2

1

7

3

Y

5

Z X

1

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is similar to the previous example, except the second surface is instead defined by

Curves 2 and 3 by using the Surface select menu icon and selecting Curves 2 and 3 to create

Surface 2.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 3

8

Method: Intersect 4

2

Curve ID List

4

Option: 2 Surface

1

Intersect Parameters...

Auto Execute

Surface 1 List Y

2 3

Surface 1

Z 7

X

Surface 2 List 1

Construct 2CurveSurface

After:

-Apply- 3

8

4

2

9 1

Y

2 3

Z 7

X

1

Surface Select Menu Icon

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect/2 Surface option. The curve is located at the

intersection of Surfaces 1 and 4.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Intersect

Curve ID List

1 4

1

Option: 2 Surface

Intersect Parameters...

Auto Execute

Y

Surface 1 List

Surface 1 Z X

Surface 2 List

Surface 4

After:

-Apply-

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Intersect method with the Plane-Surface option creates curves at the intersection of a defined

plane and a surface or a solid face. The plane and the surface or face must completely intersect

each other.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Method: Intersect

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will

appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form

Option: Plane-Surface (p. 157) for more information.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Plane List

intersect with the specified surfaces or faces, either by

Surface List entering the vector coordinates or by cursor defining them

using the Vector Select menu. Examples: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]},

Coord 0.1.

Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or solid faces

either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor

-Apply- selecting them. The Surface Select menu can be used to

define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces

or faces.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 1 and a plane whose normal is

defined at {[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

2

Object: Curve

Method: Intersect

Curve ID List

3

1

Option: Plane-Surface 1

Intersect Parameters... 1

Auto Execute

Plane List Y

Z X 4

Surface List

Surface 1

After:

-Apply- 2

5 3

1 6

Z X 4

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 2 and a plane whose normal is

defined by the Z axis of Coord 1, Coord 1.3, by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 6

Method: Intersect

Curve ID List

1

Z

2 T

Option: Plane-Surface 1 R

Intersect Parameters...

Auto Execute

Y

Plane List

Coord 1.3 Z X

Surface List 5

Surface 2

After:

-Apply- 6

Z

2

1

1 TR

7

Z X

5

Axis Select Menu Icon

3

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Intersect Parameters subordinate form appears when the Intersect Parameters button is

pressed on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form.

Intersect Parameters

Curves per Intersection Active if PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON, on the

Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Specify the

0 number of parametric cubic curves to create at each

intersection.

Max. Deviation Tolerance

0.005

Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve

Intersect Tolerance intersection using a tolerance based cubic spline.

0.05

Used by MSC.Patran to determine how many points to

create to represent the curve intersection.

OK Cancel

☞ More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This form is used to create a curve from the intersection of two planes.

Geometry Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Geometry

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Action: Create Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Intersect Otherwise, the new curves will be a Straight Line geometry

type. Parametric cubic geometry is supported by the PATRAN

Curve ID List 2 Neutral File for import or export.

1

If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in

Curve Type model units. By default, the length is calculated from the

current viewport limits to simulate an infinite construction entity.

PATRAN 2 Convention If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called

Length Calculation Points will appear. You must enter the point

Option: 2 Plane locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes that the curve length

will be calculated from.

Curve Length Once the points have been entered, press the Calculate

Curve Length button to display the curve length in the databox

Input Length based on Distance, Deltax, Deltay, Deltaz selections

Calculate Length

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

6.9282 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Distance Deltay

Specify in Plane 1 List, one or more plane definitions that

Deltax Deltaz intersect with the specified planes in Plane 2 List, either by

entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting

Calculate Curve Length them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you

want to cursor select the appropriate planes. Examples:

Coord 0.1, Plane 1

Auto Execute

Specify in Plane 2 List, one or more plane definitions that

Plane 1 List intersect with the specified planes in Plane 1 List, either by

entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting

them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you

want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

Plane 2 List

☞ More Help:

-Apply- • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Create curve 1 with a length of 0.334 from the intersection of plane 1 and 2.

Geometry

Geometry

Action: Create Before:

Object: Curve

Method: Intersect

Curve ID List 1

1

Curve Type

PATRAN 2 Convention

2

Option: 2 Plane

Curve Length

Input Length

Y

Calculate Length

Z X

0.334

Deltax Deltaz

Auto Execute

Plane 1 List

Plane 1

1

Plane 2 List

Plane 2 2

-Apply-

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option

The Manifold method with the 2 Point option creates curves directly on an existing set of

surfaces or solid faces by using two point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie

on the surface or face. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations

provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Manifold

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option:

Manifold Parameters...

Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When this toggle is

Option: 2 Point pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will

appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form

Auto Execute (p. 167) for more information.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Option: 2 Point

Auto Execute

Surface List

Starting Point List Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the

new curves will lie on, either by entering the IDs from the

keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select

menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.

Ending Point List Specify in Starting Point List and Ending Point List, the

existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the

keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10,

Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be

used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate

-Apply- surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates three curves starting with Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/2 Point option. The

curves are created on Surface 1 between Point 7 and Points 2,5 and 8.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Manifold 5

Curve ID List 2

8

1

4

Option:

Manifold Parameters... 1

6

Option: 2 Point

Auto Execute

Y 7

Surface List

X

Surface 1 Z

Point 7

After:

Ending Point List

Point 2 5 8

5

-Apply-

2

8

4

1

6

4 2

Y 7

X

Z

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 using the Manifold/2 Point option on a face of Solid 1 that is between Points 5

and 12.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

6

Method: Manifold

Curve ID List 12

1 9 7

1

Option:

Manifold Parameters... 1

Option: 2 Point 10

8 5

Auto Execute Y

Z

X

Surface List

Surface 1.5

11

Starting Point List

Point 5

After:

Ending Point List

Point 12

6

-Apply-

12

9 7

1

1

1

10

8 5

Y

Z

X

11

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Manifold/N-Points option creates curves directly on a set of surfaces or solid faces by using

two or more point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face

and they can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point

select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Method: Manifold

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

4

Option:

Manifold Parameters... Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When the Manifold

Parameters... button is pressed, the Manifold Parameters

Option: N-Points subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters

Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.

Surface

want to create curves on, either by entering the IDs from the

Point List keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select

menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.

Specify in Point List the existing point locations either by entering

the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples:

Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu

-Apply- can be used to define how you want to cursor select the

appropriate surfaces or faces.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on Surface 1

through Points 5, 8, 17, 18 and 4.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Manifold 5

8

Curve ID List

6

1 17

1

Option:

Manifold Parameters...

18 4

Option: N-Points

7

Surface Y

Surface 1

Z X

Point List

Point 5 8 17 18 4

After:

-Apply-

5

8

6

17

1

1

18 4

7

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on the top

face of Solid 1, through Points 6, 12, 13 and 5.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 6

Method: Manifold

12

Curve ID List

9 7

1

1

13

1

Option:

Manifold Parameters...

Option: N-Points 10

8 5

Surface

Solid 1.5 Y

Z

X

Point List 11

Point 6 12 13 5

After:

-Apply-

12

9 1 7

1

13

1

10

8 5

Y

Z

X

11

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Manifold Parameters subordinate form appears when the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is

ON and the Manifold Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Manifold application

form.

Manifold Parameters

Curves per Manifold

0 Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create

between each pair of points (for the 2 Point option) or

Manifold Tolerance through a set of given points (for the N-Points option).

0.005

Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the manifold using

a tolerance based cubic spline.

OK Cancel

☞ More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Method)

The Normal method creates straight parametric cubic curves from a point location, normally to

a curve or an edge. The point location can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations

provided on the Point select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Normal

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Auto Execute

Specify in Point List, the existing point locations, either by

Point List entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining

them using the Point Select menu. Examples: Point 1 10,

Curve 5.2.

Curve List Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges either by

entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting

them. Examples: Curve 10, Solid 5.2.1. The Curve Select

menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select

the appropriate curves or edges.

-Apply-

Point

New Curve

Original Curve

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 6 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 13 normally

to the edge of Curve 5.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Normal 13

Method:

Curve ID List

6

12

Auto Execute

Point List

Point 13

Curve List 5

Y

Curve 5

Z X

-Apply-

After:

13

14 12

5

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 20 normally

to an edge of Surface 4 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

17

Object: Curve 16

Method: Normal

Curve ID List

1

Auto Execute

4

Point List

Point 20

Curve List 20

Y

Curve 4

Z X 19

18

-Apply-

After:

17

16

20

Y

1

Z X 19

18 21

Curve Select Menu Icon

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creating Constant Offset Curve

This form is used to create a constant offset curve.

Geometry

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Offset

Specify the Offset Curve type to create:

1. Constant Offset

2. Variable Offset

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Offset Parameters

Constant Offset Value

Specify the constant offset value of the curve.

1.0

Repeat Count Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using

the Repeat Count parameter.

1

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Curve List the form.

Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either

by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the

keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu

Draw Direction Vector that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor

select the appropriate curves.

Reverse Direction

Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset

Reset Graphics

curve from.

-Apply- offset curve from.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Create offset curves 2 thru 4 by offsetting a distance of .5 from curve 1 using a repeat count of 3.

Geometry

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Offset

1

Curve ID List

2

Offset Parameters

Constant Offset Value

.5

Repeat Count Y

3 Z X

Auto Execute

After:

Curve List

Curve 1

Reverse Direction

4

Reset Graphics

3

-Apply-

2

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

This form is used to create a variable offset curve.

Geometry

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve Specify the Offset Curve type to create:

Method: Offset 1. Constant Offset

2. Variable Offset

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Specify the start offset value of the curve.

Offset Parameters Specify the end offset value of the curve.

Start Value Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using

1.0 the Repeat Count parameter.

1.0 Parameter Value: Defines the parametric values of the start

and end offset distances.

Repeat Count Arc Length: Function of arc length.

1

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

[Parameterization Control...] means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Auto Execute Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either

by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the

Curve List keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu

that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor

select the appropriate curves.

Draw Direction Vector Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset

curve from.

Reverse Direction

Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the

Reset Graphics offset curve from.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This form is used to define the parameterization control for the offset curve. There are two types;

Arc Length and Parameter Value.

Parameterization Control

Arc Length Select the Parameterization Method for the

Parameter Value offset curve. (Arc Length is Default )

OK Cancel

Define the start and end Parameter Values for the start and end distance of

the offset curve by using the slidebar or entering the value in the databox.

The start Parameter Value must be less than the End Parameter Value.

(Used for when the Parameterization Method is Parameter Value.

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Create curves 2 thru 3 from curve 1 by offsetting a start distance of .25 and an end distance of 1.

Use parameter values of .5 and 1.0.

Geometry

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Offset

Curve ID List

2

Offset Parameters

Start Value

0.25

End Value Y

1.0 Z X

Repeat Count

1

After:

[Parameterization Control...]

Auto Execute

Curve List

3

Curve 1

Reverse Direction

Reset Graphics 1

-Apply- Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Project method creates curves by projecting a set of curves or edges along a defined

projection vector, onto a surface or solid face.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Project

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to

Curve ID List

be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option:

Project Parameters...

If pressed, the Project Parameters subordinate form will

appear. See Project Parameters Subordinate Form

(p. 182) for more information.

Normal to Plane - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected

through a vector that is normal to at least one of the curves or edges that

define a plane.

Normal to Surf - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected

through a vector that is normal to the surface or solid face specified in

Surface List.

Define Vector - The project direction is defined by the vector coordinates

entered in the Projection Vector databox which is expressed within the

Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <1 1 0>. The Vector Select menu will

appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector definition.

View Factor - The project direction is defined by the view angle in the

current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the

normal direction of the screen.

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

List will be deleted from the database.

Projection Vector

Used if the Define Vector option is chosen. Either enter the

<0 0 0> vector coordinates that are expressed in the Refer.

Coordinate Frame, or use the Vector Select Menu that

Refer. Coordinate Frame appears to cursor define the projection vector.

Coord 0

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Delete Original Curves means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

Auto Execute

Curve List Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges that you

want to project onto the surfaces or faces listed in Surface

List.

Surface List Specify in Surface List, the surfaces or faces that the curves

or edges will be projected onto.

You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the

IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1:10,

Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.

-Apply- The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that

appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select

the appropriate curves or edges, and surfaces or faces.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• Viewing Menu (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 7 using the Create Project/Normal to Plane option. The curve is projected from

Curve 6 onto Surface 2 that is normal to the plane defined by Curve 6.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

13

Object: Curve

Method: Project

Curve ID List 5

2

7 15

6

Option:

Project Parameters...

Option: Normal to Plane

Projection Vector

Y

<0 0 0>

Z X

Refer. Coordinate Frame 12

14

Coord 0

Auto Execute 13

Curve List

Curve 6

5

Surface List 15

2 16

Surface 2

6 7

-Apply-

Z X

12

14

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 8 using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. The curve is projected from

Curve 6 normally onto Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is

deleted.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 13

Object: Curve

Method: Project

Curve ID List 5

2

15 16

8

6 7

Option:

Project Parameters...

Option: Normal to Surf

Projection Vector

Y

<0 0 0>

Z X

Refer. Coordinate Frame 12

14

Coord 0

Auto Execute 13

Curve List

Curve 6

5

Surface List 2 16

Surface 2

7

17

8

-Apply-

Z X

12

14

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 7 with the Define Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface

2 through the vector that is defined by Points 19 and 20 by using the Vector select menu icon

listed below.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 13

Object: Curve

Method: Project

Curve ID List 2

7

19

6 20

Option:

Project Parameters...

Option: Define Vector

Projection Vector

Y

Construct2PointVector

14

Coord 0

Auto Execute 13

Curve List

Curve 6

Surface List 2

Surface 2 19 21

20

7

-Apply-

Z X 12

14

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 7 with the View Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface

2 through the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed

and Curve 6 is deleted.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 13

Object: Curve

Method: Project

Curve ID List

2

7

Option: 6

Project Parameters...

Option: View Vector

Projection Vector

Y

Construct2PointVector

12

14

Coord 0

Auto Execute 13

Curve List

Curve 6

Surface List 2

15

Surface 2

7

-Apply-

Z X

12

14

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Project Parameters subordinate form appears when the Project Parameters button is pressed

on the Create/Curve/Project application form.

Project Parameters

Curves per Projection

Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on

0 the Create/Curve/Project form. If PATRAN 2 Convention

is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to

Projection Tolerance create for a given projection location.

0.005

Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve

projection location using a tolerance based cubic spline.

OK Cancel

☞ More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The PWL method will create a set of piecewise linear (or straight) parametric cubic curves

between a set of existing point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or

other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: PWL

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve

to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

1 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Functions.

Point List

-Apply- locations to connect the curves between, either by

entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor

selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10,

Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be

used to define how you want to cursor select the

appropriate point locations.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates seven curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/PWL method. The straight curves

are created through Points 12 through 18 and Node 1.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create 17 18

13 14

Object: Curve

Method: PWL

15

16

Curve ID List

5

Point List 12 1

Y

-Apply-

Z X

After:

17 10 18

13 6 14

7 9

15 8 16 11

5

12 1

19

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option

The Spline method using the Loft Spline option creates piecewise cubic polynomial spline curves

that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually

between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point

locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Spline Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to

Method:

be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Curve ID List

Functions.

1

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number

Curves per Spline of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.

0

Auto Execute

If ON, End Point Slope Control allows you to use the Start and

End Point Tangent Vector databoxes to define the tangent

vector for the slopes at the spline’s start point and end point

locations.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

End Point Slope Control Used if End Point Slope Control toggle is ON.

Specify in Start Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition

Auto Execute of the slope at the first point listed in Point List.

Start Point Tangent Vector Specify in End Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of

the slope at the last point listed in Point List.

You can either enter the vector coordinates that are

expressed in the global rectangular frame, Coord 0

End Point Tangent Vector (Example: <1.5 0 0>); or you can use the Vector Select menu

that appears to cursor define the slope’s vector.

Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to

define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard

or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point

-Apply- 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to

define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point

locations.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Spline method with the Loft Spline option. The curve is

created through Points 1 through 5. Notice that since End Point Slope Control are not pressed in,

Start and End Point Tangent Vector are disabled.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 2

1

Method: Spline

Curve ID List 3

1

5

Option: Loft Spline

4

0

Y

End Point Slope Control

Auto Execute Z X

2

1

Point List

Point 1:5 3

1

-Apply- 5

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve 2 is created with End Point

Slope Control is pressed in. The Start Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 1 and 2, and the

End Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 4 and 5, using the Vector select menu icon listed

below.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

2

Object: Curve

1

Method: Spline

Curve ID List 3

1

1

Option:Loft Spline 5

0 4

Y

Auto Execute

Start Point Tangent Vector Z X

Construct 2PointVector

Construct 2PointVector After:

2

Point List

1

Point 1:5

3

-Apply-

21

5

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The Spline/B-Spline option creates spline curves that pass through at least three point locations.

MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can

be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Spline Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to

be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

Curve ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: B-Spline

Curves per Spline Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number

of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.

B-Spline Parameters

2 10

Specify for Order, the B-Spline’s order of the polynomials. As Order

increases, MSC.Patran will create an increasingly smoother spline.

Order MSC.Patran will not create the spline if Order is greater than the

number of points listed in Point List.

Interpolation If Interpolation is ON, MSC.Patran will force the spline through the

given points. If it is OFF, the spline will only pass through the first

Closed

and last points.

If Closed is ON, MSC.Patran will created a closed spline. If it is

OFF, the spline will be open ended.

Parametrization Method

◆ Chord Length If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points

◆

◆ Uniform along the B-spline is based on the chord length distances relative to

the locations of the spline’s interior points. This means the curve may

or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the

Point List interior points are located.

If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the

B-spline will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the specified

points in the Point List are located. That is, the curve will be always

uniformly parameterized.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

other point locations to define the spline,

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric

either by entering the IDs from the

Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

keyboard or by cursor selecting the point

locations. Examples: Point 1:10, • Topology (p. 10)

Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

menu can be used to define how you • Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran

want to cursor select the appropriate Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 with the B-Spline option. The B-spline has an order of 3 and uses Points 1

through 5. Since Interpolation is not pressed, the curve is not forced to pass through all the

points.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

2

Object: Curve

1

Method: Spline

Curve ID List 3

1

5

Option: B-Spline

Curves per Spline

0 4

B-Spline Parameters Y

3 10

Z X

Order

Interpolation

After:

Closed

Parametrization Method 2

◆ Chord Length 1

◆

◆ Uniform

3

Point List 1

Point 1:5 5

-Apply- 4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the order for Curve 2 is three,

instead of five.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve 2

Method: Spline 1

Curve ID List

3

2

1

Option: B-Spline 5

Curves per Spline

0

4

B-Spline Parameters

5 10 Y

Z X

Order

Interpolation

Closed After:

Parametrization Method

2

◆ Chord Length

1

◆

◆ Uniform

Point List 3

1

Point 1:5

5

-Apply-

4

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except Interpolation is pressed and Curve 3

is forced to pass through Points 1 through 5.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

2

Method: Spline 1

Curve ID List

3 3

1

Option: B-Spline 5

Curves per Spline

0

4

B-Spline Parameters

5 10 Y

Z X

Order

Interpolation

Closed After:

Parametrization Method 2

◆ Chord Length 1

◆

◆ Uniform

3

Point List

1

Point 1:5

5

-Apply-

4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

The TanCurve method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between two

existing curves or edges. The curves or edges cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be

able to find the tangent location on each curve.

Geometry

Action: Create

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Object: Curve created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: TanCurve

Curve ID List

1 If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve/Point 1

and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the

end of the original curve.

Trim Original Curves

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Curve/Point 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Curve/Point 2 List

Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the

pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the

new curve will be created between.

For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select

-Apply- menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define

the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices,

nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

New Curve

Original Curve 1

Portions To Be Trimmed

Original Curve 2

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric

Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanCurve method. The curve is tangent between Curves 9

and 8 with Points 26 and 25 as the endpoints selected in the Point 1 and 2 Lists. Notice that Trim

Original Curves is pressed.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: TanCurve 8

9

Curve ID List

10

23 25

Trim Original Curves

Auto Execute

26 28

Curve/Point 1 List

ConstructPoint CurveUOn Curve Y

Curve/Point 2 List Z X

ConstructPoint CurveUOnCurve

-Apply- After:

30

10

29 8

9

23 25

26 28

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

(TanPoint Method)

The TanPoint method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between a point

location and a curve or an edge. The curve or edge cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will

not be able to find the tangent location. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other

point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Method: TanPoint created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

If Closest Tangent Only is chosen, the new curve will be

created at the closest tangent point to the existing point

location.

Closest Tangent Only

If All Tangents is chosen, MSC.Patran will preview each

Trim Original Curves curve to be created at all possible tangent points and ask if you

want to create a curve at each possible location.

Auto Execute

If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve List.

Point List Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the

original curve.

Curve List

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Trim Original Curves

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Auto Execute

the form.

Point List

Specify in Point List, the points, vertices, nodes or other point

locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard

Curve List (Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or by cursor

selecting the location using the Point Select menu.

Specify in Curve List, the curves or edges either by entering

the IDs or by cursor selecting them using the Curve Select

menu. Examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1.

-Apply-

New Curve

Original Curve

Portion to trim

Point

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 25 and

Curve 9. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 9 is trimmed.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: TanPoint 9

Curve ID List

10

25

Auto Execute

Z X

Point List

Point 25

Curve List

Curve 9 After:

-Apply-

29

9 10

25

26 28

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 9 and

an edge of Surface 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: TanPoint 1

1

Curve ID List

1

5 2

Trim Original Curves 9

Auto Execute Y 6

Point List

Z X

Point 9

Curve List

Curve 1.2 After:

-Apply-

1

1

10

2

5

1

Y 6

Z X

CHAPTER 4 1

Create Actions

(XYZ Method)

The XYZ method creates parametric cubic curves, surface, or solids from a specified vector

length and origin. The origin can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex,

node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.

Method: XYZ

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve,

<Type> ID List surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in

1 the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector

Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the

Coord 0 specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular

frame, Coord 0.

Vector Coordinates List Enter the vector coordinates to define the lengths and direction

for the new curves, surfaces or solids. Enter the coordinates

<1 0 0>

either from the keyboard (example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define

the vector using the Vector Select menu that appears.

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Origin Coordinates List

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

[0 0 0] the form.

surface or solid. You can express the origin’s point location

-Apply- either by entering the cartesian coordinates from the

keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select

the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point

locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid

10.4.3.1.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose

vector orientation and length is <20 10 0>.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: XYZ

Curve ID List

3

6

Coord 0

Y

<20 10 0>

X

Auto Execute Z

Point 6 After:

-Apply-

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose

vector orientation and length is <20 10 5>.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: XYZ

Surface ID List

3

6

Coord 0

Y

<20 10 5>

Z X

Auto Execute

Origin Coordinates List

Point 6 After:

7

-Apply-

8

3

6

Z X

9

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 1 whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20

10 5> which is expressed within the Reference Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: XYZ

Solid ID List

1

Coord 0

Y

<20 10 5>

Z X

Auto Execute

Origin Coordinates List

Point 6 After:

7

-Apply-

11

1 12

6

10

Y

9

Z X

13

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option

The Involute/Angles option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point

location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended

for gear designers, the Angles option requires the angle of the unwinding and the starting angle.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Involute

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: Angles

Involute Parameters

Angle to unwind the involute

0.0

Starting angle for involute Specify in Angle to unwind the involute, the angle in degrees

0.0 to unwind the involute.

Curves per Point Specify in Starting angle for involute, the starting angle in

degrees of the involute curve.

1

Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the

total involute. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2

Refer. Coordinate Frame Convention.

Coord 0

Involute Axis

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the

plane the involute curve will be in.

Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the

Auto Execute

Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular

Point List frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector

Select menu and cursor define the vector definition.

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Involute Parameters

Angle to unwind the involute

0.0

Starting angle for involute

0.0

Curves per Point

1

Coord 0

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Involute Axis Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

Auto Execute

Point List Specify the existing point, vertex, node or other point

location that defines the starting point of the involute, either

by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting

the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node

-Apply- 20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you

want to cursor select the appropriate point location.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates four curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Angles option, where the

curve is unwound 360 degrees about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, from Point 13.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Involute

Curve ID List

5 13

Option: Angles

Involute Parameters

Angle to unwind the involute

360

Y

Starting angle for involute

0.0 Z X

Curves per Point

4

After:

Coord 0

Involute Axis 15

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} 6

7

Auto Execute 14

Point List 5

13

Point 13

16

-Apply-

Y 8

Z X

17

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Involute/Radii option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point

location can be a point, vertex, node or other point location provided on the Point select menu.

Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended

for the material modeling community, the Radii option requires the base radius of the bobbin

and the radius of the stop of the curve.

Action: Create • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

Object: Curve

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

Method: Involute • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

Curve ID List • Topology (p. 10)

1 • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

Option: Radii

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Involute Parameters created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Base radius of the bobbin Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

0.0

Radius of the stop

0.0 Specify in Base radius of the bobbin, the base radius, in model

units, of the bobbin.

Curves per Point

Specify in Radius of the Stop, the radius of the stop of the

1 involute curve.

Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the

Refer. Coordinate Frame total involute.

Coord 0

Involute Axis Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane

the involute curve will be in.

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the

Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame,

Auto Execute Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu

and cursor define the vector definition.

Point List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

-Apply-

Specify the point, vertex, node or other point location that

defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the

ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location.

Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select

menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the

appropriate point location.

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates six curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Radii option, where the

curve is unwound starting with a base radius of 0.1 and a stop radius of 2, about the involute

axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, starting from Point 13.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Involute

Curve ID List

5 13

Option: Radii

Involute Parameters

Base radius of the bobbin

0.1

Radius of the stop Y

2

Z X

Curves per Point

6

After:

Coord 0

Involute Axis 18 9

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

14

Auto Execute

6 5

Point List

10 17

Point 13

13

-Apply-

15

8

Y

19

Z X 7

16

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Revolve method creates curves, surfaces or solids by the rotation of a point, curve or surface

location, respectively. The new geometric entity is rotated about a defined axis. Point locations

can be points, vertices, or nodes, Curve locations can be curves or edges. Surface locations can

be surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Curve,

Surface or Solid.

Method: Revolve

<Type> ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next entity type to

1 be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Coord 0

Specify in Axis, the coordinate values of the rotation vector

Axis that will be expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame

(default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example:

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} {[10 0 0][10 0 1]}.

You can instead use the Vector Select menu that appears, to

Revolve Parameters cursor define the rotation vector in the Axis databox.

Total Angle

90.0 Specify in Total Angle, the total positive or negative rotation

angle, in degrees, using “right-hand” rule.

Offset Angle

Specify in Offset Angle, an optional offset angle in degrees.

0.0 (Default is no offset.)

<Type> per <Type> If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify in <Type> per

<Type>, the number of curves, surfaces or solids to create

1 within the specified Total Angle. Otherwise if PATRAN 2

Convention is OFF, <Type> per <Type> is disabled.

Auto Execute

Specify the points, curves or surfaces either by cursor selecting

<Type> List them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point

5 10, Curve 10, Surface 1:10.

The Select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to

define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,

vertices, nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Functions is ON which means you do not need Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

to press the Apply button to execute the form. • Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Curves 5 and 6 using the Create/Revolve method, where the curves are created from

Points 12 and 13 about the axis, {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} for 180 degrees, with an offset of 30 degrees.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: Revolve

Curve ID List

5

12 13

Coord 0

Axis

Y

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Z X

Revolve Parameters

Total Angle

180.0

Offset Angle After:

30.0

Curves per Point

1 6

Auto Execute

Point List 5 16

Point 12 13

14

-Apply-

12 13

Y 15

Z X

17

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 1 where the surface is created from a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 using the

Curve select menu icon listed below. The surface is revolved 45 degrees about the axis {Point 1

[x1 y1 1]}.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Revolve

Surface ID List

1

Coord 0 1 2

Axis

Y

{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}

Z X

Sweep Parameters

Total Angle

45.0

Offset Angle

After:

0.0

Surfaces per Curve

1

Auto Execute 3

Curve List

Construct 2 Point Curve

1

-Apply-

1 2

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates four surfaces starting with Surface 2 using the Create/Revolve method, where the

surfaces are created from Curves 9 through 12 about the axis, {[0 0 0 ] [ 1 0 0 ]} for 360 degrees.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Revolve 21

Surface ID List 12

2 20

11

19

Refer. Coordinate Frame 10

17 9 18

Coord 0

Axis

{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}

Y

Sweep Parameters Z X

Total Angle

360.0

After:

Offset Angle

0.0

21

Surfaces per Curve

12

1 20

11

Auto Execute 19

10

Curve List 18

17 9

Curve 9:12

-Apply-

Y 2 3

X 4

5

Z

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 2. The

axis is defined by the Points 15 and 12 using the Axis select menu icon listed below, for a rotation

of 90 degrees.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid 13 14

Method: Revolve

Solid ID List

1

2

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Axis Y

12 15

Construct2PointAxis

Z X

Sweep Parameters

Total Angle

90.0

Offset Angle After:

0.0

Solids per Surface 14

1

13

Auto Execute

Surface List

2

Surface 2

1

16

-Apply-

Y 15

17

X

Z 12

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 1

about the X axis of Coord 1 (by using the Axis select menu listed below) for 90 degrees.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

2

Object: Solid

3

Method: Revolve

1

Solid ID List 1

1 4

Coord 0

Axis

Coord 1.1 Y

Y

1 X

Sweep Parameters X Z

Total Angle Z

90.0

Offset Angle After:

0.0

2

Solids per Surface

3

1

1

1

Auto Execute

4

Surface List

Surface 1 1

-Apply- Y

1 X

Z

Y 5

6 8

X

Z 7

1

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option

The 2D Normal/Input Length option creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a

defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to a curve or an edge. The curve is defined from a

specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations

provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D Normal

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference

1 Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve Length

◆ Input Length

◆

◆ Calculate Length

If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in

0.0

model units. See Creating Orthogonal Curves with the

Calculate Length Option (p. 218) for information on the

◆ Distance◆

◆ Deltay Calculate Length button.

◆

◆ Deltaic ◆ Deltaz

◆

Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List Enter in Construction Plane List, either the coordinate values of a

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} vector that is normal to the 2D plane that the new curve will lie in

(example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}); or cursor define the vector using the

Vector Select menu.

Flip Curve Direction

Auto Execute

Point List

Curve List

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Flip Curve Direction If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new

curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve length and

Auto Execute the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ1 direction

Point List is defined by the curve’s connectivity.

Curve List Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point

location the curve will be created from.

Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will

be perpendicular to. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or

-Apply- use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to

cursor define the locations.

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option, where the curve is 1 unit long; it lies within the

plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; it is perpendicular to the top edge of Surface 1; and

its starting point is near Point 3.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 2

Object: Curve 3

Method: 2D Normal

Z

Curve ID List

1 X Y

Curve Length

1

◆ Input Length

◆

◆ Calculate Length

1.0

Y

◆ Distance◆

◆ Deltay

1

◆ Deltax ◆ Deltaz

◆ ◆ Z X

4

Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane

After:

Construction Plane List

Cord 3.3

2

Flip Curve Direction

3

Auto Execute

Z

Point List

6

Point 3 1

5 X Y

Curve List 1

Surface 1.4

-Apply-

Y 1

4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Flip Curve Direction is pressed.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 2

Object: Curve 3

Method: 2D Normal

Z

Curve ID List

1 X Y

Curve Length

1

◆ Input Length

◆

◆ Calculate Length

0.0

Y

◆ Distance◆

◆ Deltay

1

◆ Deltax ◆

◆ ◆ Deltaz Z X

4

Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane

After:

Construction Plane List

Cord 3.3 2

3

Flip Curve Direction

Auto Execute Z

Point List

Point 3 5 X Y

1

6

Curve List

1

Surface 1.4

-Apply-

Y

1

Z X

4

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The 2D Normal/Calculate Length option, creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a

defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to an existing curve or edge. The curve is defined from

specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations

provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D Normal

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

4 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve Length

◆

◆ Input Length

◆ Calculate Length If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called

Length Calculation Points will appear (shown below). You must

0.0 enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes shown

below that the curve will be created between.

◆ Distance◆

◆ Deltay

◆ Deltax ◆

◆ ◆ Deltaz Press Calculate Curve Length first to update the curve length

displayed in the databox above, before you complete the

Calculate Curve Length remainder of the form (if Auto Execute is ON), or before you

press the Apply button.

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List

Coord 0.3

Length Calculation Points

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute

Auto Execute Point 1

Point List

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are

projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and

the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle

simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven

by the input point(s).

◆ Distance◆

◆ Deltay

◆ Deltax ◆

◆ ◆ Deltaz

The default construction plane now comes from the

Calculate Curve Length global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the

default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane

select menus also have a new entry to restore the

Project to Plane

databox value to the default coordinate

Construction Plane List frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default

Coord 0.3

Flip Curve Direction If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the

new curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve

Auto Execute

length and the normal direction of the construction plane.

Point List The ξ1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity.

Curve List Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point

location the curve will be created from.

Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will

be perpendicular to.

-Apply- Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point

Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the

locations.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is 1.0; it lies within the

plane whose normal is the global coordinate frame’s X axis, Coord 0.1; and it is starts from a

point that is closest to Point 6.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D Normal

1

Curve ID List 1

1

Curve Length

◆

◆ Input Length 2

◆ Calculate Length 5

0.0

◆ Distance◆

◆ Deltay Y

◆ Deltax ◆

◆ ◆ Deltaz 6

Z X

Calculate Curve Length

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List After:

Coord 0.1

8

Auto Execute 1

Point List

1

Point 6

1

Curve List

Surface 1.3 2

5

-Apply-

7

Y

6

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 with the Calculate Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is the distance

between Points 3 and 4; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; and it starts

from a point that is closest to Point 3.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

2

Object: Curve

3

Method: 2D Normal

Curve ID List Z

1

X3 Y

Curve Length

◆

◆ Input Length 1

◆ Calculate Length

1.41421

Y

◆ Distance◆

◆ Deltay

◆ Deltax ◆

◆ ◆ Deltaz

X

1

Z

Calculate Curve Length 4

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List After:

Cord 3.3

Auto Execute 2

Point List 3

Z

Point 3 6

1

Curve List

5 X3 Y

1

Surface 1.4

-Apply- 1

Y 4

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The 2D Circle method creates circular curves of a specified radius that is within a defined 2D

plane, based on a center point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other

point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D Circle

Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curves per Circle

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of

4 parametric cubic curves to compose the circle.

Circle Radius

◆ Input Radius

If Input Radius is ON, enter the value of the circle’s radius in

◆

◆ Calculate Radius model units.

If Calculate Radius is ON, specify the point location in

Radius Point List that the radius will be measured to, from the

specified center point. Either enter the ID from the keyboard

(example: Point 10, Surface 3.1.1, Node 30); or cursor select

Project to Plane the point, vertex, node or other point location using the Point

Select menu.

Construction Plane List

Coord 0.3

Auto Execute

Center Point List

[0 0 0]

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if

unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane

select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default

coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Default

Circle Radius

◆ Input Radius

◆

◆ Calculate Radius

Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point,

and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the

Construction Plane List plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the

Coord 0.3 center point, and the projection is done with respect to that

new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply

indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,

Auto Execute or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

[0 0 0] Specify the point location that defines the center of the

circle, either by entering the ID from the keyboard

(examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20); or by cursor

selecting the location. The Point Select menu can be used

-Apply- to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate

point location.

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:

Basic Functions is ON which means you do

not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form. ☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle method with the Input Radius option, where the

circle has a radius of 1.0, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal

is the Z axis of Coord 0.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D Circle

1

Curve ID List

5

4

Circle Radius

Y

◆ Input Radius

◆

◆ Calculate Radius Z X

1.0

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List

After:

Cord 0.3

Auto Execute

Center Point List

12

Node 1

-Apply- 1

5

Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle/Calculate Radius option, where the radius is

measured from Point 12 to Node 1, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose

normal is the Z axis of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D Circle

Curve ID List

5

1 12

Curves per Circle

4

Circle Radius

◆

◆ Input Radius

Y

◆ Calculate Radius

Z X

Point 12

After:

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List

Cord 0.3

Auto Execute

Center Point List

5 1 12

Node 1

-Apply-

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The 2D ArcAngles method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. The Arc parameter

inputs are Radius, Start Angle and End Angle. The point location for the arc’s center is to be

input.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D ArcAngles

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to

Curve ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

1 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Arc Parameters

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number

Radius of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.

1.0

Start Angle

0.0 Enter the Arc parameters defined as Radius, Start Angle

and End Angle (degrees).

End Angle

360.0

Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point,

and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the

Construction Plane List plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input

point, and the projection is done with respect to that new

Coord 0.3 plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply

indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,

or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

Auto Execute

Center Point List

[0 0 0]

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Arc Parameters

Radius

1.0

Start Angle

0.0

End Angle

360.0

Project to Plane The default construction plane now comes from the

global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the

Construction Plane List default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select

menus also have a new entry to restore the databox

Coord 0.3 value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane,

whichever is appropriate.

Auto Execute Default

Center Point List

[0 0 0] Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point

locations for the arc’s center point, by entering the IDs

from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,

-Apply- Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point

locations using the Point Select menu.

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Functions is ON which means you do not need

to press the Apply button to execute the form.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 1 using Create/Curve/2D ArcAngles.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D ArcAngles

Curve ID List

1

1

Arc Parameters Y

Radius

1.0 X

Z

Start Angle

0.0

End Angle

160.0 After:

Project to Plane

1

Construction Plane List

Coord 0.3

2

Auto Execute

Center Point List

[0 0 0]

Y

-Apply-

Z X 1

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option

The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are

provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting

and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s

starting and ending points.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

Method: 2D Arc2Point created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

Option: Center

Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius.

Arc2Point Parameters... (Center parameters are displayed.)

appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p.

?) for more information.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are

projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point,

and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This

toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that

plane, driven by the input point(s).

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List The default construction plane now comes from the global

Coord 0.3 preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord

0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new

entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate

frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Auto Execute

Center Point List

Default

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for

the arc’s center and arc’s starting and ending points, by entering

Ending Point List the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,

Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations

using the Point Select menu.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Minimum Angle is chosen;

the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies

within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

1

Method: 2D Arc2Point

Curve ID List

5

Option: Center

Arc2Point Parameters... 12 13

Project to Plane

Z X

Auto Execute

Center Point List After:

Point 12

5

Starting Point List

114

Point 13

Node 1

-Apply-

12 13

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Maximum Angle is chosen;

the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies

within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

1

Method: 2D Arc2Point

Curve ID List

5

Option: Center

12 13

Arc2Point Parameters...

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List Y

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Z X

Auto Execut e

Center Point List After:

Point 12

114

Starting Point List

Point 13

Node 1

12 13

-Apply-

Z X

5

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are

provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting

and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s

starting and ending points.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method: 2D Arc2Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: Radius (Center parameters are displayed.)

Arc2Point Parameters...

Project to Plane

If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will

Construction Plane List appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form

(p. 236) for more information.

Coord 0.3

Arc Radius

1.0

Flip Center Point

Auto Execute

Starting Point List

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected

directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the

projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply

indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the

input point(s).

Project to Plane

The default construction plane now comes from the global

Construction Plane List preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord

Coord 0.3 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new

entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate

frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Arc Radius

1.0

Default

Create Center Point

Flip Center Point

If Create Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be created.

Auto Execute

If Flip Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be flipped to

Starting Point List create arc.

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the

arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the

keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node

-Apply- 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 by creating an arc with a radius of 1.5 using [-1 -.5 -1] and [1 1 1] as start/end

points and in the Z construction plane.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Curve

Method:2D Arc2Point

Curve ID List

1

Option: Radius

Arc2Point Parameters...

Y

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List Z X

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Arc Radius

1.5

After:

Create Center Point

Flip Center Point

Auto Execute 2

Starting Point List

[-1 -.5 -1]

[1 1 1]

1

-Apply- 1

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form appears when the Arc2Point Parameters button is

pressed on the Create/Curve 2D Arc2Point application form.

Curves per Arc the Create/Curve/2D Arc2Point form. If PATRAN 2

Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric

1 cubic curves to create per Arc.

based on the smallest angle possible between the specified

OK Cancel

starting and ending points.

If Maximum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc

based on the largest angle possible between the specified

starting and ending points.

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The 2D Arc3Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane, based on point

locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points. The point locations can be points,

vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: 2D Arc3Point Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

Curves per Arc Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number

1 of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.

Project to Plane

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus

the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise,

the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection

is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane.

This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane

specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if

unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane

select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default

coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Default

Project to Plane

Construction Plane List

Coord 0.3

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Starting Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the

arc’s starting, middle and ending points, by entering the IDs from

the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1,

Ending Point List Node 20); or cursor defining the point locations using the Point

Select menu.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

calculated center of the arc. • Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc3Point method. The arced curve is created through the

Points 13, 14 and Node 1 and it lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that

Create Center Point is pressed in and Point 16 is created.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Curve 14

Object:

Method: 2D Arc3Point 1

Curve ID List

5

1

Project to Plane

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Y

13

Z X

Create Center Point

Auto Execute

Starting Point List After:

Point 13

145

Middle Point List

Point 14 1

15

Node 1

-Apply-

Y 16 13

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves

The Curve method using the 2 Curve option creates surfaces between two curves or edges.

Degenerate three-sided surfaces can be created. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle)

(p. 41) for more information.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to

be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Surface ID List

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: 2 Curve

Parameterization Method

◆

◆ Chord Length Deactivated and not used for the 2 Curve option.

◆ Uniform

If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or

Manifold face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the

keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor

Manifold Surface selecting it with the Surface Select menu.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Starting Curve List the form.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

or edges for the new surfaces, either by entering the

IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface

10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve

locations using the Curve Select menu.

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/2 Curve option. The curve is created between Curves

5 and 6.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Curve

17

Surface ID List

2

6

12

Option: 2 Curve 5

Parameterization Method 18

◆

◆ Chord Length

◆ Uniform

Y 16

Manifold

X

Manifold Surface Z

After:

Auto Execute

Starting Curve List

Curve 5

17

Ending Curve List

Curve 6

12 6

2

5

-Apply-

18

Y 16

X

Z

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 2 that is degenerate with the 2 Curve option which is between an edge of Surface

1 and a zero length curve defined by Point 5, twice.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Curve 2 3

Surface ID List

2

1

Option: 2 Curve 5

Parameterization Method

◆

◆ Chord Length 1 4

◆ Uniform Y

Manifold Z X

Manifold Surface

Starting Curve List

Surface 1.3

Construct 2 Point Curve

1

-Apply- 2

5

1 4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The Curve method using the 3 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through three existing

curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to

Method: be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the

points on the surface is based on the chord length distances

Option: 3 Curve

relative to the location of the surface’s middle curve. This

Parameterization Method means the surface may or may not be uniformly

parameterized, depending on where the middle curve is

◆

◆ Chord Length located.

◆ Uniform If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on

the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the

middle curve is located. That is, the surface will be always

Auto Execute uniformly parameterized.

Starting Curve List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Middle Curve List

the form.

Ending Curve List Specify in the Starting, Middle and Ending Curve Lists, the

curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,

either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:

Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining

the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/Curve option. The curve is created through Curves

5, 6 and 8.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Curve 19

Method: 8

21

Surface ID List

2 17

5 6

12

Option: 3 Curve 18

Parameterization Method 16

◆

◆ Chord Length Y

◆ Uniform

X

Z

Auto Execute

Starting Curve List

Curve 5

Curve 6

19

Curve 8 8

21

17

-Apply- 5 6

2

12

18

16

X

Z

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 2 through Curves 2, 3 and an edge of Surface 1.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

10

Object: Surface

Method: Curve 3

Surface ID List 11

8

2

2

Option: 3 Curve

1

Parameterization Method 9

◆

◆ Chord Length 6

1

◆ Uniform 1

Y 5

Auto Execute Z X

7

Starting Curve List

Surface 1.4

After:

Curve 2

Curve 3

3

-Apply- 8 11

2

1

9

6 1

1

5

Y

7

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Curve method using the 4 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through four existing

curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Surface ID List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points

Option: 4 Curve that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances

relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves.

Parameterization Method This means the surface may or may not be uniformly

parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are

◆

◆ Chord Length located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the

◆ Uniform points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of

where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be

always uniformly parameterized.

Auto Execute

Starting Curve List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify in the Starting, Second, Third and Ending Curve Lists,

the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,

Ending Curve List either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve

10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve

locations using the Curve Select menu.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Curve/4 Curve option. The curve is created through Curves

5,6 and 8 and the edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Curve 24

Surface ID List 22 2 2

3

23

Option: 4 Curve 19

8

Parameterization Method 21

17

◆

◆ Chord Length

6

◆ Uniform 12 5

18

Y

Auto Execute 16

Starting Curve List X

Z

Curve 5

After:

Curve 6

Curve 8

24

Ending Curve List

22 2

Surface 2.4 2

23

-Apply- 19

8

21

17 3

12 6

5

18

Y

16

X

Z

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Curve method using the N-Curves option creates surfaces that pass through any number of

curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Curve Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the

points that describe the surface is based on the chord length

Option: N-Curves distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and

third curves. This means the surface may or may not be

Parameterization Method

uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior

◆

◆ Chord Length curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric

coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly

◆ Uniform spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located.

That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized.

Curve List

Specify in Curve List, two or more curves or edges that the

surface will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the

keyboard (examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.2 11.1, Solid

10.1.1 12.1.1), or cursor select the curves or edges using the

Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/N-Curves option. The curve is created through

Curves 5,6,8,9 and 10.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Curve 24

22

9 10

Surface ID List 19

8 23 25

2 21

17

Option: N-Curves 12 6

5

18

Parameterization Method

16

◆

◆ Chord Length

◆ Uniform Y

Curve List X

Z

Curve 5 6 8:10

After:

-Apply-

22 24

9 10

19

8

2 23 25

21

17

12 6

5

18

16

X

Z

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Figure 4-1 The Composite method creates surfaces that are composed from multiple

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

surfaces.

When toggled ON, uses all the boundary vertices from the Surface List. When toggled OFF, will enable

vertex selection. If the Vertex List is left empty the original surface edges will be automatically merged

until a slope change is encountered in the boundary. The slope change criteria is specified by the "Node-

Edge Snap Angle" in the Finite Elements form under Preferences in the main menu. If vertices are

specified, they will be graphically marked. This option is probably the most powerful as it will allow the

mesher to ignore unimportant details on the boundary.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method:Composite

Allows the user to define larger surface regions within a model,

Surface ID List typically when existing surfaces are too detailed for mesh

2 creation. Composite surfaces may be meshed using a larger

element edge length than supported on the more detailed,

Delete Constituent Surfaces underlying surfaces. A composite surface is initially defined by

selecting the existing surfaces to be combined. The surfaces

Surface List will be graphically highlighted when picked or when the mouse

focus is put on the surface list by picking in the listbox.

Use All Edge Vertices element nodes are to be placed on the Composite Surface

boundary.

Vertex List

There are three Inner Loop Options:

All will use all closed loops to identify the interior boundary of the

composite surface.

Vertex

Options... List None will create a surface with no internal holes.

Inner Loop Option: All Select will enable the user to identify existing interior holes to be

part of the new surface. If the inner loop is defined by more than

one edge, selection of any one of those will be enough. To add a

hole which is not part of a surface, the Preview Boundary option

Preview Boundary must be used. In this case all curves have to be selected to

identify the inner loop.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

Highlights the current outer and inner

• Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)

boundary free edges and enables the

Modify Boundary Frame. • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Appears either when the Preview Boundary option is selected or if the Composite Surface

Builder was not able to identify a clean boundary from the Surface List. The free edges will be

highlighted and marked as follows:

White: Free edges within the Surface List.

Dark Blue: Free edges shared by one other surface not in the Surface List.

Cyan: Free edges shared by more than one surface not in the Surface List.

Red: Free edges that have not been processed due to either a gap or a multiple branch path in

the Surface List.

Vertex

Options... List

Modify Boundary:

Add/Remove toggles allow edges or curves to be added

◆

◆ Add ◆ Remove or removed from the Surface List boundary. Add places

selected curves and edges in the Edge List databox and

also supports curve creation on-the-fly. Remove operates

Edge List

in Autoexecute mode whereby previously highlighted

Surface 1.3 curves or edges are simply unhighlighted.

Reset contains a previous used surface and the boundary has

been modified, the previous modification list can be used

again.

-Apply- Apply will initiate the Composite Surface Builder to use

the Edge List in conjunction with the Surface List to build

a new surface. If the proposed boundary is incorrect, the

problem location will be marked and a message will

appear.

General Comments

If valid boundary loops are identified and any of the vertices in the vertex list are not part of a boundary, the

location will be marked red and the user will be prompted to “ignore and continue” or “stop”.

The Surface Builder always computes the optimal view plane based on the Surface List. In most cases this

is satisfactory; however, in some instances, it can create a very distorted parametrization of the new

surface, leading to poor finite element mesh quality. Sometimes the view selected by the user as “best” is

more successful than the recommended optimal plane (i.e., answer “No” to the prompt asking permission

to reorient the model to a better view); otherwise, the proposed Composite Surface will have to be

represented by multiple composite surfaces.

If the Composite Surface Builder often fails because of unresolved boundary edges, the gap and clean-up

tolerances are most likely too small. If edges disappear the tolerances are probably too large. The default

gap and clean-up tolerances are set equal to the global model tolerance and can be changed on the

Options form.

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

automatically close existing gaps larger than the tolerance value.

Cleanup Tol. 0.005 Only used in the Surface Builder to ignore gaps

between surface edges.

Gap Distance 0.005

Will zoom on the model location where the builder has

detected a boundary gap or branch. This is useful for

Auto Zoom In Problem large Composite Surfaces.

Controls the appearance of warning messages when

gaps or branches are encountered. For the experienced

Auto Select Outer Boundary

user, they may rather not see the warning messages but

simply rely on graphical feedback as previously

Erase Original Surfaces described.

Ok Defaults

Composite Surface. This is identical to using the Plot/Erase functionality

under Display.

boundary via a query process. This is needed if the default method of

Auto Select fails.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 2 from the surfaces in the viewport.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Composite

Z

Surface ID List

2 1 Y

X

Delete Constituent Surfaces

Surface List

Surface 1T#

Z

X Y

Use All Edge Vertices

Vertex List

After:

Options...

Vertex List

Inner Loop Option: All

Z

1 Y

X

Preview Boundary

-Apply-

Z Y

X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The Decompose method creates four sided surfaces from an existing surface or solid face by

choosing four vertex locations. This method is usually used to create surfaces from a multi-sided

trimmed surface so that you can either mesh with IsoMesh or continue to build a tri-parametric

solid.

See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 37) for more information on how to use the

Decompose method.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to

be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Decompose Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Surface 10);

or by cursor selecting the surface.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Surface Vertex 1 List means you do not need to chose the Apply button to

execute the form.

Surface Vertex 2 List Enter in the Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four

vertices that will define the new surface. Use the Vertex

Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select

the vertices.

Surface Vertex 3 List

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

-Apply-

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surfaces 3, 4 and 5 using the Create/Decompose method. The surfaces are created from

Trimmed Surface 2 and they are defined by the cursor selected vertices listed in the Surface

Vertex databoxes on the form.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 17 15

Object: Surface

Method: Decompose

14

Surface ID List

3

2

Surface

12

Surface 2

Y

Auto Execute Z X

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 1.0000

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 0.0000 17 15

Surface Vertex 3 List

Surface 2(u 0.516341)(v 0.0000 3

14

Surface 2(u 0.331216)(v 1.0000

19

4 2

-Apply-

20

12

Y

5

Z X

18 16

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The Edge method creates three or four sided surfaces that are bounded by three or four

intersecting curves or edges, without manifolding the surface to an existing surface or face.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Method: Edge created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1 Set this option to either 3 Edge or 4 Edge. The 3 Edge option

will create a degenerate three sided surface.

Option: 4 Edge

If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for

Manifold the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard

(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with

the Surface Select menu.

Manifold Surface

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Surface Edge 1 List

Enter in the Surface Edge 1,2, 3 and/or 4 Lists, the three or four

curves or edges that will bound the new surface, either by

Surface Edge 2 List entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface

10.2, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor selecting them with the Curve

Select menu that appears on the bottom.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

-Apply- • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Edge/3 Edge option. The degenerate surface is created from

Curves 5 and 6 and the edge of Surface 2. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41).

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface 13 14

Method: 5

Edge

16 2

Surface ID List

6

3

12 15

Option: 3 Edge

Manifold

Y

Manifold Surface

Z X

Auto Execute

Surface Edge 1 List

After:

Curve 5

Curve 6 13 14

5

Surface Edge 3 List

16 3 2

Surface 2.1

6

-Apply- 12 15

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface2 using the Create/Edge/4 Edge option. The surface is created from Curves 5

through 8.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Edge 18 6

7

12 5

Surface ID List

2

Option: 4 Edge 19

8

Manifold 17

Y

Manifold Surface

Z X

Auto Execute

Surface Edge 1 List

After:

Curve 5

Curve 6

7 2

Curve 7 12 5

Surface Edge 4 List

Curve 8

19

8

-Apply- 17

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Extracting Surfaces

Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option

The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them from within or on a solid, at a constant

parametric ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) , or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2

has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . One surface is extracted from each

solid.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Extract

Surface ID List

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: Parametric

Surface Plane

◆ Constant u Plane

◆

◆ Constant v Plane Select either Constant u Direction, Constant v Direction, or

Constant w Direction. The surfaces will either be created

◆

◆ Constant w Plane either along the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction;

along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction; or along

Surface Position the ξ 3 (w) direction for Constant w Direction.

0.0 1.0

0.5

value for the location of the surface, either by using the slide

bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of

Auto Execute ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 are defined by the connectivity of the solid.

Solid List You can plot the parametric directions by choosing the

Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form

under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Surface Plane

◆ Constant u Plane

◆

◆ Constant v Plane

◆

◆ Constant w Plane

Surface Position

0.0 1.0

0.5

u Parametric Value

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to

Solid List execute the form.

-Apply- surfaces from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard

(example: Solid 1:10), or cursor select the solids using

the Solid Select menu that appears on the bottom.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at

ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within Solid 1. Notice the parametric direction is displayed near Point 19.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

20

Object: Surface 2

19 1 21

Method: Extract 3 22

Surface ID List

2 1

Option: Parametric

Surface Plane

17

◆

◆ Constant u Plane Y

◆

◆ Constant v Plane 12 18

Z X

◆ Constant w Plane 16

Surface Position

0.0 1.0

0.75 After:

w Parametric Value 20

2 21

Auto Execute 19 1

Solid List 3 22

Solid 1

1

-Apply-

26

2 2

1 25

23

17

Y 24

12 18

Z X

16

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at

ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within a solid that is defined by Surfaces 1 and 2 by using the Solid select menu

icons listed below.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 10

Object: Surface

2 9

Method: Extract 7

Surface ID List 8

3

Option: Parametric 5

Surface Plane

◆

◆ Constant u Plane 1 Y 6

1

◆

◆ Constant v Plane

◆ Constant w Plane Z X

4

Surface Position

0.0 1.0

0.75 After:

w Parametric Value 10

Auto Execute

2 9

Solid List 7

8

14

-Apply-

5

11 3 13

1 Y 1 6

12

4

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them on a specified solid face. One surface is

extracted from each solid face.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Extract

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Surface ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: Face

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Face List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify in Face List, the solid faces to create surfaces on, either by

-Apply- entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 10.2 11.1); or

by cursor selecting the faces.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 using the Create/Extract/Face option. The surface is created on two

faces of Solid 10.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

20

Object: Surface 2

1 21

19

Method: Extract 3 22

Surface ID List

2 1

Option: Face

Auto Execute

17

Face List Y

12 18

Solid 1.1 1.2 Z X

16

-Apply-

After:

1

20

12 2 21

19 1

23 22

3

1

2

17

Y

12 18

Z X

16

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Fillet method creates a parametric bi-cubic surface between two existing surfaces or solid

faces. The existing surfaces or faces do not need to intersect. If they do intersect, the edges of the

surfaces or faces must be aligned, and they must intersect so that a nondegenerate fillet can be

created.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Fillet Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Surface ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Fillet Radius 1 is the fillet radius. This is either a constant fillet

Fillet Parameters radius (if Fillet Radius 2 is left blank) or part of a varying radius.

Fillet Radius 1 Only one radius value is allowed for all pairs of surfaces or faces

specified in Surface/Point 1 and 2 List.

Fillet Radius 2 is optional. If a value is entered, MSC.Patran will

Fillet Radius 2 create a fillet with a varying radius, with the first edge beginning

at Radius 1 and gradually varying to Radius 2 at the opposite

edge.

Fillet Tolerance Fillet Tolerance is used to control the accuracy of the fillet when

MSC.Patran subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet

0.005

position. Decreasing the tolerance helps when the fillet is very

small compared to the geometry model. Default is .005.

Trim Original Surfaces

Auto Execute

Surface/Point 1 List

Surface/Point 2 List

Radius 1

Fillet Patch

-Apply- Area To Be

Surface 1 Trimmed

Radius 2

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Fillet Radius 1

Fillet Radius 2

If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original surfaces specified in

the Surface/Point 1 and 2 listboxes. Each surface is trimmed

Fillet Tolerance from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original

0.005 surface.

Trim Original Surfaces Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to

Auto Execute execute the form.

Surface/Point 1 List

Specify in Surface/Point 1 List and Surface/Point 2 List,

the existing pair of surfaces or faces, along with their

corner points that the fillet will be created between. For

Surface/Point 2 List each listbox, the Surface Select menu and the Point Select

menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define

the appropriate surfaces or faces, and the points, vertices,

nodes, or other appropriate corner point locations provided

on the Point Select menu.

-Apply-

Radius 1

Fillet Patch

Area To Be

Surface 1 Trimmed

Radius 2

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 1 and 3 with the fillet’s

endpoints, Points 2 and 10, cursor selected. Surface 4 has a varying fillet radius of 0.25 to 0.5.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface 2

Method: Fillet

Surface ID List 3

4 1

Fillet Parameters 1

Fillet Radius 1 10

0.25 3

4

Fillet Radius 2 Y

0.5 X

Z

9

Fillet Tolerance

0.005

Auto Execute

Surface/Point 1 List 15

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

Surface/Point 2 List

1

1

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

14

-Apply- 11 1

10 4

3

Y

12

Z X

9

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 3 and 4 with the fillet’s

endpoints, Points 19 and 25, cursor selected. Surface 5 has a constant fillet radius of 0.75.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 24

Object: Surface

Method: Fillet

4

20 25

Surface ID List

5

Fillet Parameters 16

Fillet Radius 1 18 23

0.75 5

Y 3

Fillet Radius 2 6

17

Z X

Fillet Tolerance 19

0.005

After:

Trim Original Surfaces

30

Auto Execute

Surface/Point 1 List

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

28 4

Surface/Point 2 List

31

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

-Apply- 27 5 29

18

Y 3

6

Z X 26

19

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Match method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces with common boundaries (or matched

edges) from a pair of topologically incongruent surfaces or solid faces that have two consecutive

common vertices but unmatched edges. The surface pair need not have matching parametric

orientations. MSC.Patran requires geometry to be topologically congruent for IsoMesh and

Paver to create coincident nodes at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and

Meshing (p. 12) for more information.

You can also match incongruent surfaces with the Edit action’s Edge Match method. See

Matching Surface Edges (p. 481) for more information.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Match

Surface ID List

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface 1

1

and 2 List from the database.

Delete Original Surfaces By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Surface 1 List

Specify in Surface 1 List, the surface or face to which the new

surface will be matched. Specify in Surface 2 List, the surface or

Surface 2 List face to match with Surface 1. Either enter the IDs from the

keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them

using the Surface Select menu.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Topology (p. 10)

• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or

Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Match method that is topologically congruent with Surface

2. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 3 is deleted.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Match 13 14 18

Surface ID List

4 2 3

Auto Execute 12 15 17

Y

Surface 1 List

Surface 2 Z X

Surface 2 List

Surface 3

-Apply- After:

13 14 18

2 4

12 15 17

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This form is used to create a constant offset surface.

Geometry

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Method: Offset created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1 Specify the constant offset value of the surface.

Offset Parameters Specify the number of copies of the offset surface to create

using the Repeat Count parameter.

Constant Offset Value

1.0

Repeat Count By default, Do not use a guiding surface is set to use the

surface normal or the direction vector, if reversed from the

1

surface normal for the offset direction. If this toggle is

changed to Use first surface as guiding surface, then the

offset direction for all surfaces to be created will the same as

Do not use a the first surface in the Surface List.

guiding surface By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Surface List the form.

Specify the surface used to create an offset surface from

either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from

the keyboard. Example: Surface 10 11. The Surface select

menu that appears can be used to define how you want to

Draw Direction Vector

cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

Reverse Direction

Draws the direction vector of the surface to create the offset

Reset Graphics

surface from.

offset surface from.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Create surfaces 2 and 3 by offsetting from surface 1, a distance of 0.5 with a repeat count of 2 and

reversing the direction vector of surface 1.

Geometry

Geometry

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Offset

Surface ID List

2 1

Offset Parameters

Constant Offset Value

0.5

Repeat Count

2

Y

Do not use a X Z

guiding surface

Auto Execute

After:

Surface List

Surface 1

Reverse Direction 3

Reset Graphics 2

1

-Apply-

Y

X Z

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Ruled method creates ruled surfaces between a pair of curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Ruled

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Surface ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Surface Parameterization

◆

◆ Equal Arc Length

◆ Equal Parametric Values

If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will define the ruled

surface’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 parametric directions based on the arc

length parameterizations of the ξ 1 direction for the curves or

edges in Curve 1 List, and the ξ 2 direction for the curves or

Avoid Bow Tie Surface edges in Curve 2 List. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, the

curves or edges in Curve 1 List define the surface’s ξ 1 direction

Auto Execute and the curves or edges in Curve 2 List define the surface’s ξ 2

direction. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the curve and

Ruling Curve 1 List surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by

choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric

Properties form under the menu Display/Display

Properties/Geometric.

Ruling Curve 2 List

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

the ruled surface, so that the two curves ξ 1 directions do not

need to be aligned or be in the same direction. The resulting

Avoid Bow Tie Surface

ruled surface will not be twisted or bow tied. This is the

Auto Execute default setting. If Allow Bow Tie Surface is ON, if the ξ 1

direction of the curves or edges in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List

Ruling Curve 1 List are not aligned, a bow tie ruled surface will be created.

to create the ruled surface between. Either enter the IDs from

the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1); or cursor

-Apply-

select them using the Curve Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15)

in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite

Element Modeling

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 1 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curves 1 and 2.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

6

Object: Surface

2

Method: Ruled

5

Surface ID List

1

Surface Parameterization

◆

◆ Equal Arc Length

◆ Equal Parametric Values

1 Y

Z X 1

4

Avoid Bow Tie Surface

Auto Execute

Ruling Curve 1 List

After:

Curve 1

6

Ruling Curve 2 List

Curve 2 2

5

-Apply-

1 Y

Z X 1

4

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curve 5 and an edge

of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Notice that since Equal Parametric

Values was pressed in, Surface 3’s parametric ξ 1 direction is the same as for Curve 5.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 18

Object: Surface

Method: Ruled 19

Surface ID List

2

3

2

Surface Parameterization 17 1

◆

◆ Equal Arc Length

1

◆ Equal Parametric Values 12

Y 20

5

Z X

16

Avoid Bow Tie Surface

Auto Execute

Ruling Curve 1 List After:

Curve 5

18

Ruling Curve 2 List

Surface 2.4

19

-Apply-

2

2

17 1

1

21

12 3

Y 20

5

16

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Trimmed method creates a trimmed surface. You must first create at least one chained curve

for the surface’s outer loop or boundary by using the Create/ Curve/Chain form before using

this form, or by bringing up the Auto Chain form from within this form. (Note that an outer loop

must be specified, and the inner loop being specified is not necessary.) Trimmed surfaces can be

meshed by Paver.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Trimmed

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1 1. Surface: Creates a trimmed surface that has the same curvature

as a specified parent surface. The parent surface must be simply

trimmed (default color is green).

Option: Surface

2. Planar: Creates a flat or planar trimmed surface.

Auto Chain... 3. Composite: Combines surfaces into a single trimmed surface,

where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of

Use All Edge Vertices a specified length, and are not required to be topologically

congruent.

Delete Outer Loop

Use the Auto Chain feature to chain existing curves or surface

Outer Loop List edges into closed loops, defining the trim region.

edge and vertex locations directly from the loop or chained

Delete Inner Loops curve’s definition. That is, the edges and vertices are defined

by the links in the chained curve. If OFF, MSC.Patran will

Inner Loop List determine the edge and vertex locations of the new trimmed

surface by the slope discontinuities in the chain.

Surface List

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Specify in Outer Loop List, one chained curve to represent the outer boundary of the

trimmed surface either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Curve 10), or by

cursor selecting the curve.

Delete Outer Loop If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curves specified in

the Outer Loop List listbox.

Outer Loop List

Delete Inner Loops If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curve specified in

Inner Loop List.

Inner Loop List

Specify in Inner Loop List, one or more optional chained curves

to represent holes or cutouts in the trimmed surface, either by

entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Curve 10 12), or

Delete Constituent Surface by cursor selecting the curves.

Surface List

Specify in Surface List, the surfaces that will be the parent

surface whose curvature will be used by the trimmed surface,

either by entering the IDs from the keyboard, or by cursor

-Apply- selecting the surface. The parent surface must be simply

trimmed (default color is green).

Note: A Surface List is not required for the Planar option.

specified in Surface List below from the ☞ More Help:

database.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Creating Chained Curves (p. 131)

• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver

(p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Surface option which is created from

chained Curve 22 for the outer loop, chained Curve 21 for the inner loop and Surface 2 for the

parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are

pressed in and Curves 21 and 22 and Surface 2 are deleted.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: 16

Surface

Method: Trimmed

19

Surface ID List 18 20 2

3

21 22

12

Option: Surface

Auto Chain...

Use All Edge Vertices Y

X Z 17

Delete Outer Loop

Curve 22

After:

Delete Inner Loops

16

Curve 21

23

19 25

20 30 3

Surface List 26

29

Surface 2 27 22

28

12

-Apply-

21

Y

X Z

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Planar option which is created from

chained Curve 14 for the outer loop and chained Curve 13 for the inner loop. Notice that Delete

Outer Loop and Delete Inner Loop are pressed in and Curves 13 and 14 are deleted.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create 14

Object: Surface

Method: Trimmed

Surface ID List

2

13 12

Option: Planar

Auto Chain.. .

Use All Edge Vertices Y

Delete Outer Loop

Z X

16

Outer Loop List

Curve 14

After:

Delete Inner Loops

18 17

Inner Loop List

Curve 13

22

-Apply-

21 2 12

20

Z X

19 16

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Auto Chain form provides a more interactive, user-controllable way of creating Chain

Curves. A start curve is selected for the chain and then during the creation of the chain, if

necessary, the user will be prompted to make decisions on how to proceed by selecting the

appropriate buttons. Toggles are provided for additional control of the chain curve creation.

This subordinate form is accessible from either the Create/Curve/Chain or the

Create/Surface/Trimmed forms.

If ON, the start point of the start curve can be switched from one end of the curve to the other.

Auto Execute must be OFF. A start curve should be selected and then toggle ON and OFF to see

a white marker designating the start point.

Auto Chain Specify the existing curve or edge to use for the start curve

of a chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the

Auto Execute IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid

Select a Start Curve 5.1.1. A Curve/Edge Select menu that appears can be used

to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate

curve or edge.

the chain curve. A chain curve will be created, if it reaches

Specify End Point

the end point. If OFF, the default end point is the start point.

Switch Start Point

Pause At Every Point If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable

Current Group Only for creating a chain.

If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable

Highlight Chain Creation for creating a chain.

Delete Constituent Curves

If ON, after chain completes, the constituent curves used to

create the chain will be deleted from the database.

If ON, the created chain curve will be highlighted. Either changing the value to OFF or

picking another start curve will erase the highlight.

If ON, the OK button must be selected for each constituent curve that is

identified as the next curve in the chain. If OFF, it will automatically continue

as.far as possible before user-intervention is necessary.

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

the chain.

Next OK

Previous Quit

Backup Stop

Delete Break

-Apply- Cancel

Next: Used to update the "Choose Curve OK: Used to finalize the selection on the curve

to Continue" databox when multiple echoed in the "Choose Curve to Continue"

choices are possible, i.e. a branch. databox and continue the auto chain

process.

Previous: Used to update "Choose Curve to Quit: Used to end the auto chain process without

Continue" databox when more than attempting to creating a chain.

two curves form a branch. Use in

conjunction with the Next button.

Backup: Used to backup one curve at a time Stop: Used to end the auto chain process and

in the list of curves that have been attempt to create a chain from the

previously selected as constituents constituent curves. (Only necessary when

for the resulting chain. pressing the Apply button did not create a

chain.)

Delete: Used to delete the curve in the Break: Used to break the curve in the "Choose

"Choose Curve to Continue" Curve to Continue" databox.

databox from the database.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option provides a tool for combining surfaces into a

single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a

specified distance, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Though the constituent

surfaces are used for all evaluations without any approximation, the resulting composite surface

is seen as a single trimmed surface by all operations that reference it, such as the Paver.

Shadow Surface Method. The method used to create a composite trimmed surface is called a

Shadow Surface Method. The best way to describe a shadow surface is to use a real life analogy.

Consider a cloud in the sky to be a shadow surface. Then the sun, being the light source behind

the cloud, creates a shadow on the planet Earth, only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same

is true of the shadow surface, except a view vector is used to determine the light direction. The

shadow itself is called an Under Surface, whose valid region is defined by where the outlines of

the shadow surface appear with respect to a given view.

The Shadow Surface itself is a collection of specified surfaces, which may have gaps or overlaps

of a specified distance, and may or may not be topologically congruent. It is bounded by outer

and inner loops, defined as closed chains of curves or surface edges.

During surface evaluations, the Under Surface is used to classify the point relative to which

constituent surface (amongst the Shadow Surface) contains it. The point is mapped to the

parameter space of that constituent surface, and the evaluation is done directly on that surface.

Creating Composite Surfaces. The steps in creating composite surfaces are, for the most part,

the same as those for creating a normal trimmed surface, with the following exceptions:

• More than one surface is specified to define the curvature (multiple parent surfaces).

• A Gap Distance parameter must be specified to define the maximum length for gaps

or overlaps.

• An appropriate view must be obtained, satisfying the following:

• Double Intersections between the Shadow Surface and the view vector must not occur.

In other words, the Shadow Surface must not wrap around on itself relative to the

current view. This is because the Under Surface is flat, and there is not necessarily a

one-to-one mapping from the Shadow Surface to the Under Surface. Surfaces that

combine to create a cylinder, therefore, cannot be used to create a single composite

surface.

• No Dead Space. Unpredictable results will occur if any portion of the Shadow Surface

does not have an Under Surface counterpart. An example of dead space would be an

area on the Shadow Surface which runs parallel to the view vector. Since this portion

has no area with respect to its projection onto the Under Surface, it will not be

represented properly in the resulting composite surface. This can cause unwanted

holes or spikes in the geometry.

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Shadow

Plane

Not Acceptable

S2

S1

Acceptable

S2

S1

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option which is created from

chained Curve 5 for the outer loop, chained Curve 4 for the inner loop and Surface 1:4 for the

parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are

pressed in and Curves 1 and 2 and Surfaces 1:4 are deleted.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

2 3 5

Object: Surface 10 4 11

Method: Trimmed

12 13

2

1

Surface ID List

5

7 8

3

Option:Composite 1 4 6

Auto Chain... Y

Gap Distance

Z X

0.005

Delete Outer Loop

Curve 5

After:

10 11

Inner Loop List 12 13

Curve 4

5

Delete Constituent Surface

Surface List 8

Surface 1:4 1 4 6

-Apply- Y

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The Vertex method creates four sided surfaces from four existing point locations that define the

surface’s vertices or corners. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point

locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Method: Vertex created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

If ON, MSC.Patran will allow you to specify a surface or solid

1 face in the Manifold Surface databox to manifold the new surface

onto.

Manifold

If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face

Manifold Surface for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard

(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it

with the Surface Select menu.

Auto Execute

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Surface Vertex 1 List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify in Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 Lists, the four points,

vertices, nodes or other point locations that define the surface’s

Surface Vertex 3 List vertices or corners. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard

(examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.1.1); or

cursor select them using the Point Select menu.

Surface Vertex 4 List

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12, 13, 14 and

Node 1. Notice that since Manifold is not on, the Manifold Surface databox is disabled.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: 1 14

Surface

Method: Vertex

Surface ID List

2

Manifold

Manifold Surface

Auto Execute Y

12 13

Surface Vertex 1 List Z X

Point 12

After:

Point 13

15 14

Point 14

Node 1

-Apply- 2

Y

12 13

Z X

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

The Extrude method creates surfaces or solids by moving a curve or edge, or a surface or solid

face, respectively, through space along a defined axis with the option of scaling and rotating

simultaneously. This method is convenient for adding depth to a cross section, or for more

complex constructions that require the full capabilities of this form.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Surface or Solid.

Method: Extrude

<Type> ID List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to

1 be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

[0 0 0]

Refer. Coordinate Frame is used by the Origin of Scale and

Translation Vector Rotate databox and the Translation Vector databox to express

the coordinates of the origin and vector within a specific

<1 0 0> coordinate frame. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord

0. Enter in Origin of Scale and Rotate, the point location of the

Sweep Parameters origin of scaling and rotation. Either enter the coordinate values

(example: [10 0 0]); or use the Point Select menu to cursor

Scale Factor define alternate point locations. Enter in Translation Vector, a

1.0 vector definition defining the direction and distance that the curve

or surface is moved through space. Either enter the coordinate

Angle values (example: <10 10 1>); or use the Vector Select menu to

0.0 cursor define the translation vector.

<Type> per <Type>

1

Auto Execute

<Type> List

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Sweep Parameters

Scale Factor Enter in Scale Factor, a scaling factor value to be applied in

1.0 the two or three directions of the surface or solid, respectively.

A scale factor of one means no scaling will take place. Enter

Angle in Angle, an optional angle value in degrees to rotate the

0.0 curve or surface about the translation vector. <Type> per

<Type> is not active or used if the PATRAN 2 Convention

<Type> per <Type> toggle is OFF. If ON, enter how many parametric bi-cubic

1 surfaces per curve or how many parametric tri-cubic solids per

curve to create.

Auto Execute

<Type> List

Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or surfaces or

solid faces that you want to extrude to create the surfaces or

solids, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard

-Apply- (examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1;

for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by

using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is

ON which means you do not need

to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from Curve 5. The surface

is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction.

Before:

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Extrude

Surface ID List

1

12

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Coord 0 5

Y

Origin of Scale and Rotate

[0 0 0] 13

X

Z

Translation Vector

<1 0 0>

Scale Factor

1.0 3

Angle 4

0.0

Surface per Curve

1

Auto Execute 1

Curve List

Curve 5

-Apply- Y

1

Z X 5

2

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surface 1 is extruded +10 units in

the global Y direction about an angle of 90 degrees and with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the

scale and rotation is at Point 14.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Extrude

Surface ID List

1

12

Refer. Coordinate Frame

Coord 0 14

5

Origin of Scale and Rotate Y

Point 14 13

X

Translation Vector Z

<0 10 0>

Scale Factor

2.0 16

Angle

90.0

Surface per Curve

1

Auto Execute 15

Curve List

2

Curve 5

-Apply-

Y 12

14

Z X

13

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from a face of Solid 1. The

solid is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction, with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale

is at Point 21.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

12

Object: Solid

Method: Extrude

15 13

Solid ID List 21

2

14

Coord 0 17

Point 21 18Y 20

Translation Vector

Z X

<0 10 0> 19

Sweep Parameters

Scale Factor After:

2.0

22

Angle

0.0 25 23

Solids per Curve

24

1

Auto Execute

2

Surface List

Solid 1.5

-Apply- 12

15 21 13

Y

14

1

17

Z X 18 20

19

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Gliding Surfaces

Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option

The Glide method creates biparametric surfaces by sweeping base curve along a path defined by

a set of director curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Glide

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Surface ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option:1 Director Curve If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting

the surface. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If

Glide Input Options Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which

basically drags the director curve along the base curve surface

◆ Fixed Glide

without rotating. Three degrees-of-freedom of motion are

◆

◆ Normal Project Glide eliminated.

director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no

Scale Factor change will occur in the size of the director curve during the

1.0 glide.

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Director Curve List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Base Curve List Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act

as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Curve List, one

or more base curves or edges for surfaces. Either enter the

IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10,

Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or

cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces

-Apply- using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Gliding Surfaces with

the 2 Director Curve

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 10 for

the Director Curve and Curves 11, 13 and 14 for the Base Curves. The scale is set to 1.0 and Fixed

Glide is pressed in.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 16

Object: Surface

Method: Glide

10

Surface ID List

2

12

Glide Input Options 11

18

13

◆ Fixed Glide 19

Y

◆

◆ Normal Project Glide 14

Z X

Sweep Parameters 17

Scale Factor

1.0 After:

Auto Execute 16

20

Director Curve List

21

Curve 10

2 22

Curve 11 13 14 3

4

-Apply-

12

11

18

13

Y 19

14

Z X

17

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This option sweeps a base curve along a path defined by a pair of director curves. Automatic

scaling is optional.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Glide

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Surface ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

2

Option:2 Director Curve to fit between the two director curves, If OFF, no scaling will

occur.

Scale Base Curve

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Director Curve 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Director Curve 2 List Director Curve 1 List and Director Curve 2 List provide a

moving local coordinate system which provides for sweeping

and scaling of the base curve. The Base Curve is swept

along the two director curves. It does not need to be attached

Base Curve List

to either director. A copy will be transformed into its

appropriate position for exclusive used by the surface.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

Creates Surface 1 by using Curves 1 and 2 as the director curves and Curve 3 as the base curve

to glide along.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Glide

Surface ID List

3 1 2

1 4

2

6 5

1 3

Option:2 Director Curve

Auto Execute

Y

Director Curve 1 List Z X

Curve 1

Curve 2

After:

Base Curve List

Curve 3

-Apply-

3 1

6 1

5

1 2

2 4

Y

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Normal method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces or solids which are defined by a set of

base curves or surfaces, respectively, and an offset distance from those curves or surfaces in the

direction of the curvature. The offset may be constant or have a varying thickness.

Geometry

Set <Type> to either Surface or Solid.

Action: Create

Object: Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid

<Type>

to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Method: Normal Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If more than one

ID is listed, the thickness of each surface or solid is based on

dividing the number of surfaces or solids into the thickness

<Type> ID List value.

1

If Constant Thickness is ON, a single thickness value is

Thickness Input Options entered in the Thickness databox below (not shown here) which

◆

◆ Constant Thickness represents a constant offset distance for the Normal.

◆ Varying Thicknesses

If Varying Thickness is ON, you must enter two thickness values

Thickness at u=0; v=0

for surfaces and four thickness values for solids at the parametric

1.0 ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate locations shown on the form. (The

Thickness at u=0; v=1 form here shows the thickness databoxes for creating a surface.)

1.0

<Type> per <Type>

1

CHAPTER 4 2

Create Actions

If Frenet Frame is ON, MSC.Patran uses a Frenet Frame in which the surfaces are blended together across

the contiguous edges, provided the edges have the same ξ 1 ( u ) directions. If Construction Point is ON,

enter the point location in the Construction Point databox, which defines the offset or thickness direction.

The direction is measured from the first point of the first curve given in Curve List, to the construction point

location. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Node 100, Curve 12.1); or cursor select

the point location by using the Point Select menu.

1.0

Thickness at u=0; v=1

1.0

<Type> per <Type>

1 Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. If ON, specify the

number of parametric bi-cubic surfaces or parametric tri-cubic

Construction Point Options solids to create from each curve or surface specified in <Type>

List below.

◆ Frenet Frame

◆

◆ Construction Point

Construction Point If ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the parametric ξ1 direction for

the base curves listed in Curve List below.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to chose the Apply button to execute the form.

<Type> List

☞ More Help:

Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or the • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

surfaces or faces that you want to create surfaces or Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

solids from, respectively. Either enter the IDs from • Topology (p. 10)

the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10,

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10,

Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve

or Surface Select menu.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Curve 5. It has a

varying thickness of 0.75 at ξ 1 = 0 and x2=0 and a thickness of 2.0 at x1=0 and x2=1. Notice that

the parametric direction is on.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

13

Object: Surface

Method: Normal

5

Surface ID List

2

◆

◆ Constant Thickness

◆ Varying Thicknesses

1

Thickness at u=0; v=0 Y

0.75

Thickness at u=0; v=1 Z X 12

2.0

Surfaces per Curve

1

After:

◆ Frenet Frame

◆

◆ Construction Point

Construction Point

Auto Execute 2

13

Curve List

Curve 5 5

Y

-Apply- Z X 11

122 14

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Surface 2 which is created from an edge of Surface 1. It has a constant thickness of 0.25

and the normal direction is defined by a construction point, Point 9. Notice that the normal

direction is measured from the first vertex of the edge (Point 5) to Point 9.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface 9

Method: Normal

Surface ID List 1

2

◆ Constant Thickness 5

◆

◆ Varying Thicknesses

Y 2

Thickness

0.25 6

Z

Surfaces per Curve X

1

After:

◆

◆ Frenet Frame

◆ Construction Point 9

Construction Point

2

Point 9

Auto Execute

Curve List

5 11

Surface 1.2

1

Y 6

2

Z

X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Surface 1 and has a

thickness of 0.5. Notice that since PATRAN 2 Convention is not pressed in, the Solids per Surface

databox is disabled.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: 5

Normal

Solid ID List

1 1 6

1

Thickness Input Options

◆ Constant Thickness

◆

◆ Varying Thicknesses 4

Y

Thickness

0.5 Z X

1

After:

Flip Surface Normal

Auto Execute

8

Surface List

Surface 1

5

-Apply- 7 9

1

1 6

1

10

Y

4

Z X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the thickness is -0.5 instead of +0.5.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Normal 5

Solid ID List

1 1

1 6

Thickness Input Options

◆ Constant Thickness

◆

◆ Varying Thicknesses 4

Y

Thickness

Z X

-0.5

1

After:

Flip Surface Normal

5

Auto Execute

Surface List

Surface 1 10

1 6

1

-Apply- 1

7 9

4

Y

8

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from a face of Solid 1 and has

a thickness of 0.25.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

22

Object: Solid

Method: Normal 23

Solid ID List

3 2

2 20

1 1 18

Thickness Input Options

21

◆ Constant Thickness 19

◆

◆ Varying Thicknesses

12 Y

Thickness

0.25 Z X

17

Solids per Surface

1

After:

Flip Surface Normal

24

Auto Execute

322 2

Surface List 1 25

Solid 1.6

2 23

-Apply- 27

3 2

20

26 18

11

21

19

Y

12

Z X

17

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The Mesh method creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh. Vertices can be defined on the

surface boundary by selecting nodes in the Outer Corner Nodes or Additional Vertex Nodes

listboxes.

Every edge of the surface will have at least one node. If no node is selected to identify a vertex,

then one will be selected automatically. The nodes entered in the Outer Corner Node listbox will

define the parametrization of the surface and will also be a vertex. If no nodes are selected, 4

appropriate nodes will be selected automatically. Also the 4 nodes selected should be on the

outer loop. Additional vertices can be defined by selecting nodes in the Additional Vertex Nodes

listbox.

The longest free edge loop will be the outer loop of the surface. The holes inside the mesh can be

preserved or closed by invoking the options in the Inner Loop Options pull-down menu. When

few of the inner holes need to be preserved Inner Loop Options is set to Select. Identify the holes

by selecting at least 1 node on the hole. If selected, nodes on the outer loop and those not on the

free boundary, will be ignored.

The parametrization of the surface can also be improved by setting Surface Creation Methods to

Better Parametrization. However, if speed were important and the mesh used to create the

surface is of poor quality, selecting the Fast option under the Surface Creation Methods pull-

down menu would create a better surface.

Tessellated Surface is a representation of the underlying mesh that is used to create it. Therefore

the surface is piecewise planar and the normals are not continuous. The surface is primarily

generated to facilitate the meshing operation on complex surface models. Though these surfaces

support most of the geometry operations, it has limitations due to the nature of the surface.

To create a tessellated surface the mesh should have the following characteristics:

• Congruent 2-D elements

• Should be one connected set of elements

• No more than 2 elements should share the same 2 nodes

• The outer or inner loop should not intersect.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Figure 4-2

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Mesh

Surface ID List

9

Delete Original Elements If toggled ON, the elements selected will be deleted when

the surface is created successfully.

Element List

Elm 1:322 364:445

Congruent element list that defines the surface.

the resulting green surface or the parent surface of a

Outer Corner Nodes trimmed surface. If any of the boxes are left empty, one

1 Node 292 2 Node 288 will be selected automatically.

If there are more than four vertices for the surface, the

additional nodes can be listed in the Additional Vertex

Nodes listbox.

Additional Vertex Nodes

Node 50 34 303

By setting Inner Loop Options to All, None or Select, the

holes in the resulting surface can be defined.

Inner Loop Options: All Note: When the Inner Loop Options is set to Select, a

node listbox opens. Here the holes to be preserved can

be identified by the nodes on its edge. Any nodes not

Surface Creation Methods

on the hole edge or on the outer boundary will be

Fast ignored.

-Apply-

be placed on parametrization or speed.

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creating Midsurfaces

Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option

This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Automatic Method.

Geometry

Geometry

Action: Create

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Object: Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List

1 Specify the midsurface option:

1. Automatic

2. Manual

Max. Thickness Specify the maximum distance the solid face pairs can be apart

in order to calculate a midsurface between (wall thickness)

0.01

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Solid List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.

Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can

-Apply- be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate

solid.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Create surfaces 1t6 by automatically computing the midsurfaces of solid 1 where the solid wall

thickness is less than 8.1.

Geometry

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List

1

1

Max. Thickness

8.1

Auto Execute

Z

Solid List

Y

Solid 1 X

After:

-Apply-

5

3

1 6

4

1

Z

Y

X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Manual Method. The resulting midsurface

will be trimmed to the domain of the parent surface pairs.

Geometry

Geometry

Action: Create

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be

Object: Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List

Specify the midsurface option:

1 1. Automatic

2. Manual

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

First Surface Set

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Offset Surface Set from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from

the keyboard. Example: Surface 1, Solid 1.1. The Surface

select menu that appears can be used to define how you want

to cursor select the appropriate surface.

-Apply- Specify the offset surface set of the pair to create a midsurface

from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from

the keyboard. Example: Surface 2, Solid 1.2. The Surface

select menu that appears can be used to define how you want

to cursor select the appropriate surface.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Create surfaces 1t3 by manually selecting solid faces Solid 1.5 and Solid 1.9, Solid 1.4 and Solid

1.8, Solid 1.7 and Solid 1.10 as face pairs to create the midsurfaces from.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Surface

Method: Midsurface

Surface ID List

1

Auto Execute

Solid Face List

Solid 1.5 1.4 1.7

Y

Offset Solid Face List

Solid 1.9 1.8 1.10 Z X

After:

-Apply-

1 3

Z X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creating a Solid Block

This form is used to create a solid block with user input a point, length, width, height, and

reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the

input target solid using the created block as the tool solid.

Geometry

Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:

Action: Create

1. Block

Object: Solid 2. Cylinder

Method: Primitive 3. Cone

4. Sphere

5. Torus

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Block Parameters Specify the length, width, and height of the block.

X Length List

1.0

Y Length List

1.0

Z Length List

1.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the

selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a

boolean operation on with the created block.

Modify Solid

Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the block.

Boolean Operation...

Default is the global coord 0.

Refer. Coordinate Frame By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Coord 0 Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute Specify the base origin point of the block. Under The Refer.

Coordinate Frame, the created block will start at this location

Base Origin Point List extending length in x-axis, width in y-axis, and height in z-axis. If

[0 0 0] the base origin point is an [x,y,z] definition, the origin of the

block will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates solid blocks 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] and [2 0 0] with parameters of X=1.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 and

X=2.0, Y=2.0, Z=2.0 respectively.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Block Parameters

X Length List

1.0 2.0

Y

Y Length List

Z X

1.0 2.0

Z Length List

1.0 2.0 After:

Modify Solid

Boolean Operation...

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Base Origin Point List

[0 0 0] [2 0 0]

Y

-Apply-

Z X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates solid block 1 at [-1 .5 .5] with parameters of X=5.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 while performing a

boolean add operation with solid 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

1

Solid ID List

2

Block Parameters

X Length List

5.0

Y Length List Y

1.0 Z X

Z Length List

1.0 After:

Modify Solid

Boolean Operation...

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Base Origin Point List

[-1 .5 .5] Boolean Operation

Geometry

-Apply- Y

X

Target Solid List Z

Solid 1

OK Cancel

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This form is used to create a solid cylinder with user input a point, height, radius, optional

thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform

boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cylinder as the tool solid.

Geometry

Action: Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:

Create

1. Block

Object: Solid

2. Cylinder

Method: Primitive 3. Cone

4. Sphere

5. Torus

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Cylinder Parameters Specify the height, radius, and optional thickness which is used

Height List to shell the cylinder.

1.0 Default = 0.0 which designates no shelling.

Radius List

1.0

[Thickness List]

0.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the

selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a

boolean operation on with the created cylinder.

Modify Solid

Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the

Boolean Operation...

cylinder. Default is the global coord 0.

Refer. Coordinate Frame By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Coord 0 need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute Specify the base center point and the axis of the cylinder.

If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the

Base Center Point List cylinder will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.

The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate

[0 0 0]

Frame, therefore, the cylinder axis will be defined by the absolute

value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of

Axis List Coord 0.

Coord 0.3

☞ More Help:

-Apply- • Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates solid cylinder 1 at point 1with parameters of Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, along X axis.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

1

Cylinder Parameters

Height List

3.0

Y

Radius List

0.25 Z X

[Thickness List]

0.0 After:

Modify Solid

Boolean Operation...

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Base Center Point List

Point 1

Axis List

Y

Coord 0.1

Z X

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid Cylinder 1 at point 1 with parameters Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, a wall thickness =

0.125 along X axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

8

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive 9

5

1

Solid ID List

2

Cylinder Parameters

6

Height List 3

3.0

Y 2

Radius List

Z X

0.25

[Thickness List]

0.125 After:

Modify Solid

8

Boolean Operation...

9

5

Refer. Coordinate Frame

4

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Base Center Point ListBoolean Operation

3

point 1 Geometry

2

Axis List

Y

Coord 0.1

Target Solid List Z X

Solid 1

-Apply-

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)

OK Cancel

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

This form is used to create a solid sphere with user input a point, radius, and optional reference

coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target

solid using the created sphere as the tool solid.

Geometry

Action: Create Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:

1. Block

Object: Solid

2. Cylinder

Method: Primitive 3. Cone

4. Sphere

5. Torus

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Sphere Parameters

Specify the radius of the sphere

Radius List

1.0

Modify Solid

If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the

Boolean Operation... selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a

boolean operation on with the created sphere.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the

sphere. Default is the global coord 0.

Coord 0

Auto Execute

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Center Point List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0]

Axis List Specify the center point and the axis of the sphere.

Coord 0.3 If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the

sphere will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate

Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.

Coordinate Frame, therefore, the sphere axis will be defined by

-Apply- the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the

z axis of Coord 0.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Sphere Parameters

Radius List

1.0

Y

Modify Solid Z X

Boolean Operation...

After:

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Center Point List

[0 0 0]

Axis List

Coord 0.3

-Apply-

Z X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid Sphere 1 at point 1with a Radius of 0.5 along the Y axis while performing a boolean

add operation with solid 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

2

Sphere Parameters

Radius List

0.5

Y

Modify Solid Z X

Boolean Operation...

After:

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Center Point List

Point 1

Axis List

Coord 0.2

Boolean Operation

Geometry

-Apply-

Solid 1

OK Cancel

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This form is used to create a solid cone with user input a point, base radius, top radius, height,

optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to

perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cone as the tool solid.

Action: Create 1. Block

Object: 2. Cylinder

Solid

3. Cone

Method: Primitive

4. Sphere

5. Torus

Solid ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Cone Parameters Specify the height, top radius, bottom radius, and optional

Height List thickness. The optional thickness is used to create a hollow

cone.

1.0

Default = 0.0 which designates no hollowing.

Base Radius List

1.0

0.5

If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the

[Thickness List] selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a

boolean operation on with the created cone.

0.0

Modify Solid Default is the global coord 0.

Boolean Operation... By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Refer. Coordinate Frame need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Coord 0

Specify the base center point and the axis of the cone.

If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of

Auto Execute the cone will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate

Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.

Base Center Point List Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cone axis will be defined by

the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is

[0 0 0] the z axis of Coord 0.

Axis List

Coord 0.3

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

-Apply-

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid Cone 1 at [0 0 0] and Cone 2 at [3 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Height=2.0,

Base Radius=1.0, Top Radius=0.5 and Thickness for Cone 1=0.0 and Thickness for Cone 2=0.125

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Cone Parameters

Height List

2.0

Y

Base Radius List

1.0 Z X

0.5 After:

[Thickness List]

0.0 0.125

Modify Solid

Boolean Operation...

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Base Center Point List

Y

[0 0 0] [3 0 0]

Z X

Axis List

Coord 0.3

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid Cones 1 and 2 at [.5 1 .5] along the Y axis with parameters Height=-5.0, Base

Radius=0.25, Top Radius=0.0625 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1 and 2.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive 1

Solid ID List

1

Cone Parameters

Height List 2

2.0

Y

Base Radius List

Z X

1.0

0.5 After:

[Thickness List]

0.0 0.125

Modify Solid

Boolean Operation...

Coord 0

Boolean Operation

Auto Execute Geometry

Base Center Point List

[0 0 0] [3 0 0] Y

-Apply-

OK Cancel

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

This form is used to create a solid torus with user input a point, major radius, minor radius, and

optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation

with the input target solid using the created torus as the tool solid.

1. Block

Action: Create

2. Cylinder

Object: Solid 3. Cone

Method: Primitive 4. Sphere

5. Torus

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Solid ID List

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Specify the major radius and minor radius.

Torus Parameters

Major Radius List

1.0

0.5

Modify Solid If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the

selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a

Boolean Operation... boolean operation on with the created torus.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Default is the global coord 0.

Coord 0

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Center Point List

Specify the center point and the axis of the torus.

[0 0 0] If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the torus

will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The

Axis List input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame,

therefore, the torus axis will be defined by the absolute value of

Coord 0.3

the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid Torus 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.5 and

Torus 1 along the X axis and Torus 2 along the Y axis.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Torus Parameters

Major Radius List

1.0

Y

Minor Radius List

0.5 Z X

Modify Solid

After:

Boolean Operation...

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Center Point List

[0 0 0]

Axis List

Coord 0.1 0.2

Y

-Apply-

Z X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid Torus 1 at [0 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor

Radius=0.25 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

2

Torus Parameters

Major Radius List

1.0

Y

Minor Radius List

0.25 Z X

Modify Solid

After:

Boolean Operation...

Coord 0

Auto Execute

Center Point List

[0 0 0]

Geometry

Coord 0.3

Y

-Apply-

Target Solid List

Z X

Solid 1

OK Cancel

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation on an existing solid during the creation

of a new primitive solid. This is a child form of the parent Create,Solid,Primitive form.

Geometry

1. Add

2. Subtract

3. Intersect

Target Solid List

Specify the solid to perform a boolean operation on either by

cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.

Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can

be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) solids.

OK

mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically

after a boolean operation. If the Geometry Preference toggle,

Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will

be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”.

Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will

update the existing mesh on the target solid.

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creating Solids from Two Surfaces

The Surface method with the 2 Surface option, creates solids between two surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Solid ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: 2 Surface

Deactivated and not used for the 2 Surface option.

Parameterization Method

◆

◆ Chord Length If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2

directions. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s

◆ Uniform

connectivity. On the Geometric Properties form under the

menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric you can plot the ξ1

Auto Align Orientations direction of the new curves by turning the Parametric Direction

toggle ON.

Auto Execute

Starting Surface List Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the surfaces to be

created, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard

(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor define the

surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the

Ending Surface List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Topology (p. 10)

• Connectivity (p. 15)

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Basic Functions is ON which means you do Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surfaces

2 and 3.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

7

Object: Solid 10

11 6

Method: Surface

3

Solid ID List

1

9

2

Option: 2 Surface 12

Parameterization Method

◆

◆ Chord Length

◆ Uniform Y

8

Z X

Auto Align Orientations

5

Auto Execute

Starting Surface List After:

Surface 2

7

Ending Surface List 10

11 6

Surface 3

3

-Apply-

1

9

2

12

Y

8

Z X

5

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surface

2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6, using the Surface select menu icon listed below.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

22

6

Object: Solid

Method: 23

Surface

Solid ID List

1 20

5 18

Option: 2 Surface 21

19

Parameterization Method 2

◆

◆ Chord Length

◆ Uniform 12 Y

Z X

Auto Align Orientations

17

Auto Execute

Starting Surface List

After:

Surface 2

6

Construct2CurvesSurface(Eval

23

-Apply-

20

5 1 18

21

19

2

12 Y

17

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Surface method with the 3 Surface option creates solids that pass through three existing

surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

Solid ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: 3 Surface defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances

Parameterization Method relative to the location of the solid’s starting, middle and ending

surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly

◆

◆ Chord Length parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If

◆ Uniform Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining

the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the

surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly

Auto Align Orientations parameterized.

Auto Execute

If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2

Starting Surface List directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are

defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction

of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on

Middle Surface List the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display

Properties/Geometric.

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Starting Surface List the form.

Middle Surface List Specify in Starting, Middle and Ending Surface Lists, the

surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through,

either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:

Ending Surface List Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor defining the surface

locations using the Surface Select menu.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric

Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/3 Surface option. The solid is created between a face

of Solid 1, Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 by using the Surface select menu

icon listed below.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 22 6

23

Object: Solid 20 5

21

Method: Surface 18

2 19

Solid ID List 12

17

2

Option: 3 Surface 31

30

Parameterization Method 27

◆ 26

◆ Chord Length

◆ Uniform Y 1

28

Auto Align Orientations Z X 29

24

25

Auto Execute

Starting Surface List

Solid 1.2 After:

Middle Surface List 22 6

23

Surface 2 20 5

21

Ending Surface List

18

Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 2 19

12

17

-Apply-

31

30

27

26

Y 1

Z X 29

24

25

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The Surface method using the 4 Surface option creates solids that pass through four existing

surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.

See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Solid ID List Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Option: 4 Surface defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances

relative to the location of the solid’s starting, second, third and

Parameterization Method ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be

◆

◆ Chord Length uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are

located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the

◆ Uniform points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of

where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always

Auto Align Orientations uniformly parameterized.

Auto Execute

Starting Surface List If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2

directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are

defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction

Second Surface List of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on

the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display

Properties/Geometric.

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Starting Surface List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass

Third Surface List through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:

Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or by cursor defining the surface

locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Ending Surface List

• Topology (p. 10)

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric

Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/4 Surface option. The solid is created between a face

of Solid 1, Surface 2, a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 and Surface 3.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 35

3 34

Object: 32

Solid 33

Method: Surface

22 6

23

Solid ID List 20 5

21

2 18

2 19

12

Option: 4 Surface 17

Parameterization Method 31

30

◆

◆ Chord Length 27

26

◆ Uniform Y

1

28

Auto Align Orientations Z X 29

24

25

Auto Execute

Starting Surface List

After:

Solid 1.2

35

Second Surface List 3 34

32

Surface 2 33

22 6

Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 23

20 5

Ending Surface List 2

21

18

Surface 3 2 19

12

17

-Apply- 31

30

27

26

Y

1

28

Z X 29

24

25

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Surface method using the N-Surfaces option creates solids that pass through any number of

existing surfaces or solid faces.

Geometry

Action: Create

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.

Object: Solid See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Surface

Solid ID List

1 If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points

defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances

Option: N-Surfaces relative to the location of the surfaces specified in Surface List.

This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized,

Parameterization Method depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON,

◆

◆ Chord Length the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be

uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located.

◆ Uniform That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.

If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2

Surface List directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are

defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction

of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on

the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display

Properties/Geometric.

-Apply-

Specify in Surface List, two or more surfaces or faces that the solid

will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard

(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the

surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric

Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid1 using the Create/Surface/N-Surfaces option. The solid is created between

Surfaces 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

Before:

Geometry 42

Action: Create 41

39

Object: Solid 38

Method: 36

Surface 10 35

Solid ID List 9

33

1

8 32

43

Option:N-Surfaces 40

14

28 13

7

Parameterization Method 24 37

Y 20

◆

◆ Chord Length 2 34

◆ Uniform X 16

Z

12 15

Auto Align Orientations

Surface List

After:

Surface 2 7:10

42

41

-Apply- 39

38

36

10 35

9

33

8 32

1

43

40

28 13

7 14

24 37

Y 20

2 34

X 16

Z

12 15

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The B-rep method creates boundary represented solids by specifying a list of surfaces or solid

faces that form a closed topologically congruent volume. B-rep solids can only be meshed with

MSC.Patran’s TetMesh. For more information, see Gliding Solids (p. 348).

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: B-rep Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List

1

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces from the

database that are specified in Surface List.

Delete Original Surfaces

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Surface List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

form a closed volume. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard

(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the

surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu that appears.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic

Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• B-rep Solid (p. 24)

• Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Solid/B-rep method which is created from Surfaces 2, 3, 4, and

8 through 14. Notice that since Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in, the surfaces are deleted.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: 4

Solid

2

8 3

Method: B-rep

Solid ID List

14

1 9

13

Auto Execute 10

Surface List

Y

Surface 2 3 4 8:14 12

Z X

-Apply-

After:

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Decompose method creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex

locations on each face and then a solid is created from the two decomposed faces.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Decompose

Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.

See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,

2

Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid Faces

◆ Face 1

◆

◆ Face 2 The switch to select/show the two Solid Faces.

Solid Face 1

Enter the first solid face to decompose either by entering the ID

from the keyboard (example: Solid 1.1); or by cursor selecting

the solid face.

Auto Execute

Face Vertex 1 List

Face Vertex 2 List Enter in the Face Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices

that will define the surface from which the new solid will be created

from. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to

cursor select the vertices.

Face Vertex 3 List

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

-Apply- • Topology (p. 10)

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid

1.5.

Geometry Step 1:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

2

Method: Decompose

3

Solid ID List 6

2 7

Solid Faces 1

◆ Face 1 1

◆

◆ Face 2

Y 4

5

Solid Face 1 Z X 8

Solid 1.6

Auto Execute

Face Vertex 1 List

1.6(u0.250000)(v0.750000)

1.6(u0.788091)(v0.706851)

1.6(u0.727486)(v0.239363)

1.6(u0.239563)(v0.283655)

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid

1.6.

Geometry

Step 2:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

2

Method: Decompose

3

6

Solid ID List

2 7

Solid Faces 1

◆ Face 1 1

◆

◆ Face 2

Y 4

5

Solid Face 2 Z X 8

Solid 1.5

Auto Execute

Face Vertex 1 List

Final Step:

1.5(u0.314087)(v0.722847)

1.5(u0.707491)(v0.666261) 2

Face Vertex 3 List 3

1.5(u0.658263)(v0.286671) 6 13

16

Face Vertex 4 List 7

9 2

1.5(u0.291373)(v0.250680)

12 14 15

1

-Apply- 10

Y 11 4

5

Z X 8

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The Face method creates a solid from five or six surfaces or solid faces which define the solid’s

exterior faces. The surfaces or faces can be in any order and they can have any parametric

orientation, but they must define a valid exterior of a solid.

Geometry

Action: Create Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Object: Solid Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method: Face

Solid ID List

1

Option: 6 Face

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Solid Face 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Specify in the Solid Face Lists, the list of surfaces or solid

faces that the solid will be created from. Depending if the form

is set to the 5 Face or 6 Face option, you will see five or six

Solid Face 3 List Solid Face List boxes. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard

(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them

using the Surface Select menu.

Solid Face 4 List

☞ More Help:

Solid Face 6 List • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

-Apply-

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 2 through 7. The

option is set to 6 Face.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

5

Method: Face

Solid ID List

1 4

7

6

Option: 6 Face

3

Auto Execute

Solid Face 1 List

Y

Surface 2 2

Surface 6

After:

Surface 4

Surface 5

Surface 7

1

Surface 3

-Apply-

Z X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 1 through 5. The

option is set to 5 Face.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

3

Object: Solid

Method: Face 5

1

Solid ID List 4 3

1 2

1 2

5

Option: 5 Face

Y 4 6

Auto Execute

Solid Face 1 List Z X

Surface 1

Surface 3

Surface 2

3

Solid Face 4 List

Surface 4

5

Solid Face 5 List

Surface 5 1

1 2

-Apply-

Y 4 6

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Vertex method creates parametric tri-cubic solids by specifying a list of eight point locations

that represent the eight vertices of the new solid. The point locations can be points, vertices,

nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

Method: Vertex created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List

1

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

Solid Vertex 1 List

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

the form.

Specify in Solid Vertex 1-8 Lists, the list of points, vertices,

nodes or other point locations that the solid will be created

Solid Vertex 4 List from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point

10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or cursor select them using the Point

Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)

-Apply-

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For

Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12 through 15 and

Nodes 34, 44, 254 and 264.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create 14

13

15

Object: Solid

12

Method: Vertex

Solid ID List

2

Auto Execute

Solid Vertex 1 List

Point 12

Point 13

Z X

Solid Vertex 3 List

Point 14

Point 15

13 14

Solid Vertex 5 List 15

Node 34

12

Solid Vertex 6 List

1

Node 44 19

Solid Vertex 7 List

Node 254 16

18

Solid Vertex 8 List

Node 264 17

Y

-Apply-

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Gliding Solids

The Glide method creates triparametric solids by sweeping a base surface curve along a path

defined by a set of director curves or edges.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Solid

Method: Glide Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Solid ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids

Glide Input Options twisting the solid. One degree-of-freedom of motion is

eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed”

◆ Normal Project Glide logic which basically drags the director curve along the

◆

◆ Fixed Glide base curve or base surface without rotating. Three

degrees-of -freedom of motion are eliminated.

Sweep Parameters

Scale Factor Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the

director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no

1.0 change will occur in the size of the director curve during

the glide.

Auto Execute

Director Curve List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to

execute the form.

Base Surface List

Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will

act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Surface

List, a base surface or face for the Glide method for solids.

Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for

curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces -

-Apply-

Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or

edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface

Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 5 for the Director

Curve and Surface 2 for the Base Surface. The scale is set to 0.25 and Fixed Glide is pressed in.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Solid

16

Method: Glide 17

2

Solid ID List 12

1 18

Glide Input Options 5

◆

◆ Normal Project Glide 15

◆ Fixed Glide Z

Y

Sweep Parameters X

Scale Factor

0.25

Director Curve List

Curve 5

16

Base Surface List

17

Surface 2

2

12

-Apply-

18

1

5

19

20

21 15

Z

Y

X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method

The 3Point method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying

three point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations

provided on the Point select menu. For more information, see Overview of Create Methods For

Coordinate Frames (p. 63).

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Method: 3Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate

frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Coord ID List

1

Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular

Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values

Refer. Coordinate Frame of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered.

Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Coord 0

Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Origin need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0]

Point on Axis 3

Specify three point locations for: 1 ) the new coordinate frame’s

[0 0 1] origin; 2) a point on the third axis; and 3) a point on the plane

formed by the coordinate frame’s first and third axes. Either

Point on Plane 1-3 enter the point locations’ coordinate values (example: [10 0 0])

or cursor select the point locations using the Point Select menu.

[1 0 0]

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/3Point method. Its origin is

located at [0,0,0]; a point on its Z axis is at [0,0,1]; and a point on the R-Z plane is at [0,0,1]. The

coordinate values are expressed within the global coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Method: 3Point

Coord ID List

100

2

Type: Cylindrical

Coord 0 Y

Z X

Auto Execute

Origin

[0 0 0]

[0 0 1]

[1 0 0]

-Apply- T

2 Z R

100

Z X

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200. Its origin is located at Point 8; a point on its Z

axis is at [x8 y8 2] (which is at the X and Y coordinates of Point 8 and at Z=2); and a point on the

R-Z plane is at Point 6.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Method: 3Point 1

1

Coord ID List

200

Type: Cylindrical 5

2

Coord 0 8

Y

Auto Execute 6

Z

Origin X

Point 8

Point on Axis 3

After:

[x8 y8 2]

Point 6 1

1

-Apply-

T

2

Z8

200

R

Y

6

Z

X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The Axis method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying

three point locations for the coordinate frame’s origin, at the first, second or third axis and on

one of the remaining two axes. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point

locations provided on the Point select menu. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate

Frames (p. 63).

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame

Method: Axis to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Coord ID List

1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular

Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of

Refer. Coordinate Frame the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is

the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Coord 0

Axis: Axis 1 and 2

Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Origin need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

[0 0 0]

Point on Axis 1

Specify three point locations for: 1) the new coordinate frame’s

[1 0 0] origin, 2) a point on axis 1, 2 or 3 and 3) a point on axis 2, 3 or 1.

Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor

Point on Axis 2 select the point locations by using the Point Select menu.

[0 1 0]

-Apply-

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/Axis method. Its definition

is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0; its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a

point on its X axis is at Point 20; and a point on its Y axis is at Point 12.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

16 19

Object: Coord

Method: Axis

Coord ID List

100

2 12

Type: Rectangular

Coord 0 Y

Auto Execute

Origin

[0 0 0]

After:

Point on Axis 1

Point 20 16 19

Point on Axis 2

Point 12

-Apply-

2 100 Y

Z 12

X

20

Y

17 Z X 18

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The Euler method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame through three

specified rotations about the axes of an existing coordinate frame. See Overview of Create

Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63).

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate

Method: frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

Euler MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Coord ID List

1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular Specify the coordinate frame whose axes the three rotations

will be about. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord

Refer. Coordinate Frame 0.

Coord 0

When ON, a Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears

which is described on Rotation Parameters Subordinate

Axis:Rotation Parameters ... Form Example (p. 357).

Auto Execute

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Origin Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

[0 0 0] the form.

-Apply- Specify the point location for the origin of the new coordinate

frame, either by entering the coordinate values which are

expressed within the reference coordinate frame (example:

[10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the

Point Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates a spherical coordinate frame, Coord 200, using the Create/Euler method. Its definition

is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100; its origin is located at Point 14

and it is rotated 45 degrees about Coord 100’s X axis.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

Object: Coord 13

Method: Euler

Coord ID List

200

Type: Spherical

Z X

Y

Axis:

Rotation Parameters ... 12

Z X

14

Auto Execute

Origin

Point 14 After:

-Apply-

13

100

Z X

Y 12

Y 200

X

Z X Z

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears when the Rotation Parameters button is

pressed on the Geometry Application Create/Coord/Euler form. See Creating Coordinate

Frames Using the Euler Method (p. 355).

This form allows you to define up to three rotations to be performed about the specified

Reference Coordinate Frame axes. The rotations are performed in sequence from top to bottom

on the form.

Rotation Parameters

First Rotation

Axis: About Axis 3 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.

Angle of Rotation

0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to

rotate about the indicated axis.

Second Rotation

Axis: About Axis 1 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.

Angle of Rotation

0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to

rotate about the indicated axis.

Third Rotation

Axis: About Axis 3 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About

Axis 3.

Angle of Rotation

0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to

rotate about the indicated axis.

OK Cancel

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The Normal method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its

origin at a point location on a specified surface or solid face, and its axis 3 direction normal to

the surface or face. The coordinate frame’s axis 1 direction can be aligned with the surface’s or

face’s parametric ξ 1 direction, and its axis 2 direction will be aligned with the ξ 2 direction or

visa versa. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63) for more

information.

You can plot the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction button

on the Geometric Properties form under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate

Method: Normal frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Coord ID List

1

Create x-axis of the coordinate frame along the u-direction or

along the v-direction of the surface.

Type: Rectangular

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Origin

[0 0 0] Specify in Origin, the point location for the origin of the new

coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values that

Surface are expressed within the global rectangular coordinate frame,

Coord 0 (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point

location using the Point Select menu.

Specify in Surface, the surface or solid face that the new

coordinate frame will be created on, whose normal direction will

-Apply- define the coordinate frame’s axis 3 direction. Either enter the

ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or

cursor select it by using the Surface Select menu.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference

Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1, using the Create/Normal method whose Z axis

is normal to Surface 2 and its origin is at Point 16. Notice that Coord 1’s X and Y axis are aligned

with Surface 2’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions.

Geometry Before:

Action: Create

13

Object: Coord 15

Method: Normal

16

Coord ID List

1 2

Type: Rectangular 2

Auto Execute

Y

1 12

Origin

Z

Point 16 X

14

Surface

Surface 2

After:

13

-Apply- 15

Y Z

16

1

X

Y

1 12

Z

X

14

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2 at Point 17, whose Z axis is normal to the top face

of Solid 1.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Method: Normal

1

17

Coord ID List 13

2 9

16

10

T

Type: Rectangular Z 12

R 14

Auto Execute Y

11

15

Origin

Z

Point 17 X

Surface

solid 1.6

After:

-Apply-

Z

1

X2

17

13 Y

9

16

10

T

Z 12

R 14

Y

11

15

Z

X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The 2 Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its

origin at the designated location. Two of the through coordinate frame axes are defined using

existing vectors; their directions are imposed at the selected origin and the new coordinate frame

is then created.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Method: 2Vector

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate

frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

Coord ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Refer. Coordinate Frame frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

Coord 0 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Axis: Axis 1 and 2 Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.

Auto Execute

Origin

[0 0 0] Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

Vector for Axis 2 Select the vectors that define two of the through coordinate

frame axes.

-Apply-

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

The View Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate frame at the

designated origin, using the Euler angles that define the current model orientation within the

graphics viewport.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Coord

Method:View Vector

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate

frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the

Coord ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

1

Refer. Coordinate Frame angles are to be computed and subsequently used to define the

Coord 0 new coordinate frame.

Auto Execute

Origin

[0 0 0] Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

-Apply-

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method

The Point-Vector method creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.

Geometry

Action: Create Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be

Object: Plane created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Method Point-Vector

Plane ID List

1

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Auto Execute the form.

Point List

Specify the points from which the new planes will be created.

Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the

keyboard. Example: Point1 5, Curve 1.1. The Point Select

Vector List menu that appears can be used to define how you want to

cursor select the appropriate points.

Specify the vectors for the new planes. Either cursor select the

Apply vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1

5. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define

how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2

Geometry Modeling

Creates a plane at a point and normal to a vector.

Geometry

Before:

Action: Create

Object: Plane

Method Point-Vector

Plane ID List

1

1 1

Auto Execute

Point List

Point 1 Y

Vector List

Z X

Vector 1

Apply After:

1 1

Z X

CHAPTER 4 3

Create Actions

The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified

vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.

Geometry

Action: Create

Object: Plane

Method Vector Normal

Plane ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be

created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Used to define the plane offset from the vector base point.

0.0

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute

Vector List the form.

Point 2

Specify the vectors from which the new planes will be created.

Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the

Apply keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Vector Select

menu that appears can be used to define how you want to

cursor select the appropriate vectors.

☞ More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

• Topology (p. 10)

• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART